2018 Escape

User Manual: Pdf 2018-escape

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 517 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

July 2018
Fourth Printing
Owner’s Manual
Escape
Litho in U.S.A.
JJ5J 19A321 AC
2018 ESCAPE Owner’s Manual
owner.ford.com ford.ca
2018 ESCAPE Owner’s Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2018
All rights reserved.
Part Number: JJ5J 19A321 AC 201706 20180503131409
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and
maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure,
avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
except as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your
hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For
more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Introduction
About This Manual ..........................................7
Symbols Glossary ............................................7
Data Recording .................................................9
Perchlorate ........................................................11
Ford Credit .........................................................11
Replacement Parts Recommendation
............................................................................12
Special Notices ...............................................12
Mobile Communications Equipment
............................................................................13
Export Unique Options ................................14
Environment
Protecting the Environment .......................15
At a Glance
Instrument Panel Overview .......................16
Child Safety
General Information ......................................18
Installing Child Restraints ...........................19
Booster Seats .................................................25
Child Restraint Positioning .........................27
Child Safety Locks ........................................29
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation ...................................31
Fastening the Seatbelts ..............................32
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................34
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ............................................................35
Seatbelt Reminder ........................................35
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance ...............................................37
Seatbelt Extension ........................................37
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™.........................38
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation .................................39
Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................40
Front Passenger Sensing System ............41
Side Airbags ....................................................43
Driver Knee Airbag ........................................45
Safety Canopy™...........................................45
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ......46
Airbag Disposal ..............................................47
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies ................................................48
Remote Control .............................................48
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
...........................................................................52
MyKey™
Principle of Operation .................................53
Creating a MyKey ..........................................54
Clearing All MyKeys ......................................54
Checking MyKey System Status ..............56
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems ........................................................57
MyKey Troubleshooting ..............................57
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking ................................59
Keyless Entry ...................................................62
Liftgate
Manual Liftgate .............................................65
Power Liftgate ................................................66
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System .......................69
Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................70
1
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Table of Contents
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ....................71
Audio Control ...................................................71
Voice Control ...................................................72
Cruise Control .................................................72
Information Display Control ......................73
Heated Steering Wheel ...............................73
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers ........................................74
Autowipers .......................................................74
Windshield Washers .....................................75
Rear Window Wiper and Washers ..........75
Lighting
General Information ......................................77
Lighting Control ..............................................77
Autolamps .......................................................78
Instrument Lighting Dimmer .....................78
Headlamp Exit Delay ...................................79
Daytime Running Lamps ............................79
Automatic High Beam Control .................79
Front Fog Lamps ...........................................80
Direction Indicators .......................................81
Interior Lamps .................................................81
Ambient Lighting ............................................81
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows .............................................83
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................84
Interior Mirror ..................................................85
Sun Visors ........................................................86
Moonroof .........................................................86
Instrument Cluster
Gauges ..............................................................88
Warning Lamps and Indicators ...............89
Audible Warnings and Indicators ............92
Information Displays
General Information .....................................93
Trip Computer ................................................96
Information Messages ................................96
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control ...........................108
Automatic Climate Control .....................109
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
...........................................................................111
Heated Windows and Mirrors ..................114
Cabin Air Filter ................................................114
Remote Start ..................................................115
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position ..................116
Head Restraints ............................................116
Manual Seats .................................................118
Power Seats ...................................................119
Memory Function ..........................................121
Rear Seats .......................................................122
Heated Seats .................................................123
Universal Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener ..............124
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points ...............................128
Storage Compartments
Center Console .............................................130
Overhead Console ......................................130
Rear Seat Armrest .......................................130
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information ....................................131
Ignition Switch ...............................................131
2
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Table of Contents
Keyless Starting .............................................131
Starting a Gasoline Engine .......................132
Engine Block Heater ...................................135
Unique Driving Characteristics
Auto-Start-Stop ...........................................137
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions ......................................139
Fuel Quality ....................................................139
Fuel Filler Funnel Location ......................140
Running Out of Fuel .....................................141
Refueling .........................................................142
Fuel Consumption .......................................145
Engine Emission Control
Emission Law ................................................147
Catalytic Converter .....................................148
Transmission
Automatic Transmission ............................151
Four-Wheel Drive
Principle of Operation ................................155
Using Four-Wheel Drive ............................155
Brakes
General Information ...................................160
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
........................................................................160
Parking Brake .................................................161
Electric Parking Brake .................................161
Hill Start Assist .............................................163
Traction Control
Principle of Operation ................................165
Using Traction Control ...............................165
Stability Control
Principle of Operation ...............................166
Using Stability Control ...............................167
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation ...............................168
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................168
Front Parking Aid .........................................169
Side Sensing System ..................................170
Active Park Assist .........................................172
Rear View Camera .......................................178
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation ................................182
Using Cruise Control ...................................182
Using Adaptive Cruise Control ...............183
Driving Aids
Driver Alert .....................................................189
Lane Keeping System ................................190
Blind Spot Information System .............195
Cross Traffic Alert ........................................196
Steering ...........................................................199
Collision Warning System ........................199
Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage ........................202
Luggage Covers ...........................................202
Roof Racks and Load Carriers ...............203
Load Limit .....................................................204
Towing
Towing a Trailer ...........................................209
Trailer Sway Control ...................................210
Recommended Towing Weights ...........210
Essential Towing Checks ...........................212
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels ......214
3
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Table of Contents
Driving Hints
Breaking-In .....................................................216
Economical Driving .....................................216
Driving Through Water ...............................217
Floor Mats .......................................................217
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance ..................................219
Hazard Flashers ..........................................220
Fuel Shutoff ..................................................220
Jump Starting the Vehicle .........................221
Post-Crash Alert System ..........................223
Transporting the Vehicle ..........................223
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need ..............225
In California (U.S. Only) ............................226
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) .....................227
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only) ......................228
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada .......................................................228
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
........................................................................230
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)
........................................................................230
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
........................................................................230
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart ..........................232
Changing a Fuse ...........................................241
Maintenance
General Information ..................................243
Opening and Closing the Hood .............243
Under Hood Overview - 1.5L EcoBoost™
........................................................................244
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost™
........................................................................245
Under Hood Overview - 2.5L ..................246
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.5L EcoBoost™
........................................................................248
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost™/
2.5L ..............................................................248
Engine Oil Check .........................................248
Oil Change Indicator Reset .....................249
Engine Coolant Check ..............................250
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check
........................................................................254
Brake Fluid Check .......................................254
Power Steering Fluid Check ....................255
Washer Fluid Check ...................................255
Fuel Filter .......................................................255
Changing the 12V Battery ........................255
Checking the Wiper Blades .....................257
Changing the Wiper Blades ....................258
Adjusting the Headlamps .......................258
Changing a Bulb .........................................260
Bulb Specification Chart .........................264
Changing the Engine Air Filter ...............266
Vehicle Care
General Information ..................................268
Cleaning Products ......................................268
Cleaning the Exterior .................................268
Waxing ............................................................270
Cleaning the Engine ...................................270
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
........................................................................270
Cleaning the Interior ....................................271
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens ........................271
Cleaning Leather Seats .............................272
Repairing Minor Paint Damage ..............273
Cleaning the Wheels ..................................273
Vehicle Storage ............................................273
Wheels and Tires
General Information ..................................276
4
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Table of Contents
Tire Care .........................................................278
Using Snow Chains .....................................291
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...........291
Changing a Road Wheel ..........................295
Technical Specifications .........................299
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 1.5L EcoBoost™
.........................................................................301
Engine Specifications - 2.0L EcoBoost™
.........................................................................301
Engine Specifications - 2.5L ...................302
Motorcraft Parts - 1.5L EcoBoost™......303
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoost™....304
Motorcraft Parts - 2.5L .............................305
Vehicle Identification Number ..............306
Vehicle Certification Label ......................307
Transmission Code Designation ...........307
Capacities and Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoost™..............................................308
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™................................................312
Capacities and Specifications - 2.5L
.........................................................................316
Audio System
General Information ...................................321
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC ...........................................................322
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Touchscreen Display ...............324
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony Audio
System ........................................................326
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD
.........................................................................327
Digital Radio ..................................................332
Satellite Radio .............................................334
USB Port .........................................................337
SYNC™
General Information ..................................338
Using Voice Recognition ..........................340
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ...........342
SYNC™ Applications and Services ......354
Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player
........................................................................359
SYNC™ Troubleshooting ........................368
SYNC™ 3
General Information ..................................376
Home Screen ...............................................388
Using Voice Recognition ..........................390
Entertainment .............................................396
Phone ..............................................................407
Navigation ......................................................412
Apps ................................................................420
Settings ..........................................................423
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting .....................437
Accessories
Accessories ....................................................451
Ford Protect
Ford Protect ..................................................453
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information ......455
Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........458
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance .............................................461
Scheduled Maintenance Record ..........463
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility .............474
End User License Agreement .................476
5
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Table of Contents
6
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
E162384
Air conditioning system
E231157
Air conditioning system lubricant
type
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Brake system
7
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
E270480
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
E71880
Fasten seatbelt
E231160
Flammable
E67017
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard flashers
Heated rear window
Windshield defrosting system
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
8
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
E270945
Horn control
Panic alarm
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
E231159
Requires registered technician
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E231158
See Service Manual
Service engine soon
E270849
Passenger airbag activated
E270850
Passenger airbag deactivated
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Hill descent control
E271982
Trail control
E270969
Windshield wiping system
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
with other information we may have about
you, (for example, your contact
information), to offer you products or
services that may interest you. Data may
be provided to our service providers such
9
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
as part suppliers that may help diagnose
malfunctions, and who are similarly
obligated to protect data. We retain this
data only as long as necessary to perform
these functions or to comply with law. We
may provide information where required
in response to official requests to law
enforcement or other government
authorities or third parties acting with
lawful authority or court order, and such
information may be used in legal
proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if
you choose to use connected apps and
services, such as SYNC Vehicle Health
Report or MyFord Mobile App, you consent
that certain diagnostic information may
also be accessed electronically by Ford
Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
you, where permitted by law. For Canada
only, for more information, please review
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries. See SYNC™ (page 338).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
•How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
•Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
10
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 338).
Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 338).
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
We offer a number of convenient ways for
you to contact us, and to manage your
account.
Call 1-800-727-7000.
For more information about Ford Credit
and access to Account Manager, go to
www.ford.com/finance.
11
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
Warranty may not cover damage caused
to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. For additional information,
refer to the terms and conditions of the
Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
see the Warranty Manual that is provided
to you along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNING: You risk death or serious
injury to yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: NEVER use a rearward
facing child restraint on a seat protected
by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur.
12
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING: Do not connect wireless
plug-in devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain
access to vehicle data and impair the
performance of safety related systems.
Only allow repair facilities that follow our
service and repair instructions to connect
their equipment to the data link connector.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in
conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
reprogramming services. Installing an
aftermarket device that uses the DLC
during normal driving for purposes such as
remote insurance company monitoring,
transmission of vehicle data to other
devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in
devices unless approved by Ford. The
vehicle Warranty will not cover damage
caused by an aftermarket plug-in device.
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks
and Utility Type Vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read
this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle
is not a passenger car. As with other
vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury or death.
Using Your Vehicle With a
Snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for
snowplowing.
Your vehicle does not have a snowplowing
package.
Using Your Vehicle as an
Ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an
ambulance.
Your vehicle does not have the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
13
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
14
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For details about Ford Motor
Company's sustainability progress and
initiatives visit:
Web Address
www.sustainability.ford.com
15
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Environment
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
Instrument Panel Overview
E273080
Air vents.A
Direction indicators. See
Direction Indicators (page 81).
B
Instrument cluster. See Gauges
(page 88).
C
Wiper lever. See Windshield
Wipers (page 74).
D
CD slot. See Audio Unit (page
322).
E
Information and entertainment
display.
F
Audio unit. See Audio Unit
(page 322).
G
Hazard flasher button. See
Hazard Flashers (page 220).
H
Active park assist. See Active
Park Assist (page 172).
I
Parking aid button. See
Principle of Operation (page
168).
J
Heated steering wheel button.
See Heated Steering Wheel
(page 73).
K
Auto-Start-Stop button. See
Auto-Start-Stop (page 137).
L
Climate controls. See
Automatic Climate Control
(page 109).
M
16
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
At a Glance
Keyless start button. See
Keyless Starting (page 131).
N
Audio control. See Audio
Control (page 71). Voice
control. See Voice Control
(page 72).
O
Steering wheel adjustment. See
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
(page 71).
P
Horn.Q
Cruise control buttons. See
Using Cruise Control (page
182). Adaptive cruise control
(ACC) buttons. See Using
Adaptive Cruise Control (page
183).
R
Information display controls.
See Information Displays
(page 93).
S
Lighting control. See Lighting
Control (page 77). Front fog
lamps. See Front Fog Lamps
(page 80). Instrument lighting
dimmer. See Instrument
Lighting Dimmer (page 78).
Liftgate. See Power Liftgate
(page 66).
T
17
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
At a Glance
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your
child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, base their recommendations
for child restraints on probable child height,
age and weight thresholds, or on the
minimum requirements of the law. We
recommend that you check with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) to make sure that you
properly install the child restraint in your
vehicle and that you consult your
pediatrician to make sure you have a child
restraint appropriate for your child. To
locate a child restraint fitting station and
CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in child
restraints made especially for their height,
age and weight, may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise very
quickly. Exposure of people or animals to
these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious heat
related injuries, including brain damage.
Small children are particularly at risk.
18
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint
type
Child size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle seatbelt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seatback
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than
80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
•You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
•Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
•When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 41).
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Restraints
E142594
19
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
Use a child restraint (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally
age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children
12 years old and under in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If you are
unable to properly secure all children in a
rear seating position, properly secure the
largest child on the front seat. If you must
use a forward facing child restraint on the
front seat, move the seat as far back as
possible. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you
secure a child restraint, and depending on
the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
When installing a child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
•Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
•Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
•Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the child
restraint , with the tongue between the
child restraint and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
•Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child restraint will be installed in the
upright position.
•Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child restraint
illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint.
E142528
1. Position the child restraint in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
20
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing
is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
21
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once you add the extra
weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will additionally help
to remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Do not attach two child
safety restraints to the same anchor. In a
crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
22
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
WARNING: Depending on where you
secure a child restraint, and depending on
the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
where the seat backrest and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor behind that seating position.
LATCH compatible child restraints have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child
restraint. However, you can still use the
seatbelt to attach the child restraint. For
forward-facing child restraints, you must
attach the top tether strap to the proper
top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has
been provided with your child restraint.
E142535
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the seating
positions marked with the child restraint
symbol.
E144054
The LATCH anchors are at the rear section
of the rear seat between the cushion and
seat backrest below the symbols as
shown. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions to properly
install a child restraint with LATCH
attachments. Follow the instructions on
attaching child restraints with tether
straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child restraint only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING: The standardized
spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in
(280 mm) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
23
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 18 in
(46 cm) apart. A child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed
at the center seating position. LATCH
compatible child restraints (with
attachments on belt webbing) can only be
used at this seating position provided that
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions permit use with the anchor
spacing stated. Do not attach a child
restraint to any lower anchor if an adjacent
child restraint is attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the child restraint, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
to side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than 1 in (2.5 cm) when you do
this for a proper installation.
If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being injured in
a crash greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Restraints
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
restraint.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child
restraints include a tether strap
which extends from the back of
the child restraint and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older child restraints.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your child
restraint does not reach the appropriate
top tether anchor in your vehicle.
Once you install the child restraint using
either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of
the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
E142537
Perform the following steps to install a
child restraint with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child restraint
off your vehicle seat cushion when the child
is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child restraint.
Keeping the child restraint just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
24
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
1. Route the child restraint tether strap
over the back of the seat. For the
outermost seating positions, route the
tether strap under the head restraint
and between the head restraint posts.
For the center seating positions, route
the tether strap over the top of the
head restraint. If needed, you can also
remove the head restraints.
E142538
2. Locate the correct anchor on the back
panel of the rear seat for the selected
seating position. The anchors are
labeled with the tether strap symbol
and are partially covered by the gap
panel. Pull the panel back to fully
expose the anchors.
E142539
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
4. Tighten the child restraint tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions. If your child restraint
system has a tether strap, and the child
restraint manufacturer recommends
its use, we also recommend its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back. Failure
to follow this instruction could reduce the
effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase
the risk of injury or death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety restraint
(generally children who are less than 57 in
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age 4 and
less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach
age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or
80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
25
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
E142595
•Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
•Can the child sit without slouching?
•Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
•Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
•Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
•Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat backrest
or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E70710
•High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
26
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children
12 years old and under in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If you are
unable to properly secure all children in a
rear seating position, properly secure the
largest child on the front seat. If you must
use a forward facing child restraint on the
front seat, move the seat as far back as
possible. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in personal injury
or death.
WARNING: Always carefully follow
the instructions and warnings provided by
the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
27
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not allow a
passenger to hold a child on their lap when
your vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows,
books or towels to boost your child's
height. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure child
restraints or booster seats when they are
not in use. They could become projectiles
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back. Failure
to follow this instruction could reduce the
effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase
the risk of injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children or
pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
28
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children
Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X
Combined
Weight of
Child and
Child
Restraint
Restraint
Type
Seatbelt
Only
Seatbelt
and LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
and Top
Tether
Anchor)
Seatbelt
and Top
Tether
Anchor
LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
Only)
LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
and Top
Tether
Anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child
restraint
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child
restraint
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child
restraint
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child
restraint
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
116).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
29
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
30
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
injury, make sure children sit where they
can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger
hold a child on his or her lap while your
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in
your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle
and one tongue that are designed to be
used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on
the outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the safety belt around your neck over
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.
WARNING: When possible, all
children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating
position.
WARNING: Safety belts and seats
can become hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny weather; they could
burn a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child anywhere
near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat
occupants, including pregnant women,
should wear safety belts for optimum
protection in an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
•lap and shoulder safety belts
•shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety
belt)
•height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions
31
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
•retractor and anchor pretensioner at
the front outboard seating positions
•belt tension sensor at the front
outboard passenger seating position
E71880
•safety belt warning light and chime
E67017
•crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The safety belt pretensioners are designed
to activate in frontal, near-frontal and side
crashes, and in rollovers. The safety belt
pretensioners on the retractor and anchor
at the front seating positions are designed
to tighten the safety belts firmly against
the occupant's body when activated. This
helps increase the effectiveness of the
safety belts. In frontal crashes, the safety
belt pretensioners can be activated alone
or, if the crash is of sufficient severity,
together with the front airbags.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
E142589
When in use, place the rear seatbelts in the
belt guides on the outermost seat
backrests.
32
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of
the seatbelt snugly and low across the
hips. Position the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See the
following figure.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNING: If your vehicle is involved
in a crash, have the seatbelts and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking
mode, and the front outboard passenger
and rear seat seatbelts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock,
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a
small length of webbing back toward the
stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline
the rear seat backrest or push the seat
backrest cushion away from the seatbelt.
Feed a small length of webbing back
toward the stowed position.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt still
retracts to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode
is not available on the driver seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Use this mode any time a child safety seat,
except a booster, is installed in passenger
front or rear seating positions. Properly
restrain children 12 years old and under in
a rear seating position whenever possible.
See Child Safety (page 18).
33
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out. Allow the belt to retract. As the
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seatbelt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and turn on the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
How to Extract Seatbelts in the
Rear Outermost Positions
Seatbelts in the rear outermost positions
can lock if you firmly return the seat
backrest to its upright position. You can
unlock the seatbelts using the following
procedures.
For vehicles where the rear seats recline:
1. Recline the seat to its full rear recline
position.
2. The seatbelt should then unlock.
3. Return the seat backrest to its desired
upright position.
For vehicles with rear seats that do not
recline or are locked with the seat in its full
rear recline position:
1. Grasp the seatbelt webbing at the top
of the seat backrest.
2. Pull the seatbelt webbing forward,
firmly.
3. After pulling the seatbelt forward,
allow the seatbelt to feed back into the
seatbelt retractor as much as possible.
If necessary, press the seat backrest
down to allow the seatbelt webbing to
retract further.
4. The seatbelt should then unlock.
5. If the seatbelt does not unlock, repeat
steps 1-3.
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the seatbelt
height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the seatbelt correctly could
reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
34
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
E87511
To adjust the shoulder belt height, squeeze
the button and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
E71880
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
ThenIf
The seatbelt warning light illuminates and
the warning chime sounds for a few
seconds.
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
The seatbelt warning light and warning
chime turn off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The seatbelt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the on position...
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the
front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder feature for objects you place
in the front passenger seat, only the front
seat passengers receive warnings as
determined by the front passenger sensing
system.
35
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
(warnings for about five minutes) for one
passenger (driver or front passenger), the
other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to turn on.
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle
your safety belts before you switch the
ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
You or the front seat passenger do not
buckle your safety belts before your vehicle
reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on...
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING: While the system allows
you to deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We
recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may
use your vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
•The parking brake is set.
•The transmission is in park (P).
•The ignition is off.
•The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After
Step 2, wait an additional five seconds
before proceeding with Step 3. Once
you start Step 3, you must complete
the procedure within 60 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the safety belt warning
light turns on.
36
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
4. While the safety belt warning light is
on, buckle and then unbuckle the
safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt
warning light flashes for confirmation.
•This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
•This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
restraint seatbelts to make sure there are
no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies,
including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt
buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat
backrest (if equipped), child safety seat
LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a
crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
We recommend that all seatbelt
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
crash be replaced. However, if the crash
was minor and an authorized dealer finds
that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not
need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies
not in use during a crash should also be
inspected and replaced if either damage
or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
Care (page 268).
SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNING: Persons who fit into the
vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result in
serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Only use extensions
provided free of charge by Ford Motor
Company dealers. The dealer will provide
an extension designed specifically for this
vehicle, model year and seating position.
The use of an extension intended for
another vehicle, model year or seating
position may not offer you the full
protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt
restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt
extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt
extension with an inflatable seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not use extensions
to change the fit of the belt across the
torso, over the lap or to make the seatbelt
buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Ford Motor Company dealers. Only Ford
seatbelt extensions made by the original
equipment seatbelts manufacturer should
be used with Ford seatbelts. Ask your
authorized dealer if your extension is
compatible with your Ford vehicle restraint
system.
37
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Seatbelts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able
to analyze different occupant conditions
and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety
of frontal crash situations.
The Vehicle Personal Safety System
consists of:
•Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
•Front seat outermost seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
•Driver seat position sensor.
•Passenger seat position sensor.
•Front passenger sensing system.
•Passenger airbag off and on indicators.
•Front crash severity sensors.
•Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
•Restraint system warning lamp and
tone.
•The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners,
front seatbelt usage sensors, driver
seat position sensor, front passenger
sensing system and indicators.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the seatbelt pretensioners, one or
both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
38
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from
a deploying airbag is the greatest close to
the trim covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the steering
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Several airbag system
components get hot after inflation. To
reduce the risk of injury, do not touch them
after inflation.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
39
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the steering
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
•Driver and passenger airbag modules.
•Front passenger sensing system.
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 46).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING: National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at
least 10 in (25 cm) between an occupant's
chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
•Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
•Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
40
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
WARNING: Always sit upright
against your seatback with your feet on
the floor.
WARNING: Any alteration or
modification to the front passenger seat
may affect the performance of the front
passenger sensing system. This could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are
part of the front passenger seat and
seatbelt to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.
E225141
The indicators are on the center stack of
the instrument panel.
41
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The front passenger sensing system uses
passenger airbag status indicators that
illuminate indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either on
(enabled) or off (disabled).
Note: The indicators illuminate briefly when
you first switch the ignition on to confirm
they are functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a
rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is
detected. Even with this technology,
parents are strongly encouraged to
always properly restrain children in the rear
seat. The sensor also switches off the
passenger front airbag and seat-mounted
side airbag when the passenger seat is
empty.
•When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
passenger airbag status off indicator
illuminates and stays lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal airbag
is disabled.
•If you have installed the child restraint
and the passenger airbag status on
indicator illuminates, then switch the
vehicle off, remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the
restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the front passenger
seat.
•When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the
passenger airbag status on indicator
illuminates and remains illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the passenger airbag
is disabled, it is possible that the person is
not sitting properly in the seat. If this
happens:
•Switch the vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seat backrest in
the full upright position.
•Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person's legs comfortably extended.
•Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This allows the system to
detect that person and enables the
passenger frontal airbag.
•If the passenger airbag status off
indicator remains lit even after this,
advise the person to ride in the rear
seat.
Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag Status
Indicator
Occupant
Disabled
OFF: Lit
Empty ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
42
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag Status
Indicator
Occupant
ON: Unlit
Enabled
OFF: Unlit
Adult ON: Lit
Note: When the passenger airbag status
off indicator illuminates, the passenger side
airbag (seat mounted) may be disabled to
avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seat backrest,
and centered on the seat cushion, with
their feet comfortably extended on the
floor. Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
greatly increases.
If you think that the status of the passenger
airbag off indicator is incorrect, check for
the following:
•Objects lodged underneath the seat.
•Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.
•Objects hanging off the seat backrest.
•Objects stowed in the seat backrest
map pocket.
•Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
•Cargo interference with the seat.
•Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat.
•Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.
The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to
be incorrectly interpreted by the passenger
sensing system. The person in the front
passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in
the list above.
E67017
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 46).
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the
front seats), or in front seat areas that may
come into contact with a deploying airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
43
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNING: Do not use accessory
seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the airbag, its
fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing
an airbag as you could be seriously injured
or killed. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
WARNING: If the side airbag has
deployed, the airbag will not function
again. The side airbag system (including
the seat) must be inspected and serviced
by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
•A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
•Side airbags located inside the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
•Front passenger sensing system.
E67017
•Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
46).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
side airbag if it detects an empty passenger
seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
44
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG
A driver's knee airbag is located under the
instrument panel. During a crash, the
restraints control module may activate the
driver's knee airbag based on crash severity
and occupant conditions. Under certain
crash and occupant conditions, the driver’s
knee airbag may deploy but the driver’s
front airbag may not activate. As with front
and side airbags, it is important to be
properly seated and restrained to reduce
the risk of death or serious injury.
E67017
Make sure the knee airbag is
operating properly. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 46).
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into contact
with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The curtain airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
The Safety Canopy deploys during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be
activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
45
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
E75004
The system consists of the following:
•Safety Canopy curtain airbags above
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
•A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 46).
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy
will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat because it is designed to inflate
downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front end of your vehicle
(including hood, bumper system, frame,
front end body structure, tow hooks and
hood pins) may affect the performance of
the airbag system, increasing the risk of
injury. Do not modify or add equipment to
the front end of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module. The restraints control module
deploys (activates) the front seatbelt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, knee airbag(s), seat mounted side
airbags and Safety Canopy airbags. Based
on the type of crash, the restraints control
module will deploy the appropriate safety
devices.
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
E67017
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after you
switch the ignition on.
•The readiness light either flashes or
stays lit.
•You will hear a series of five beeps. The
tone pattern repeats periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
46
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The seatbelt pretensioners and the front
airbag supplemental restraint system are
designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to
cause the restraints control module to
deploy a safety device.
The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
•The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration).
•The design of the seatbelt
pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal, side crashes and rollovers.
•The knee airbag(s) may deploy based
on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
•The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side crashes. The
design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
and when a certain likelihood of
rollover is detected by the rollover
sensor. Side airbags and Safety Canopy
airbags may activate in other types of
crashes if the vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
47
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range.
One of the following could cause a
decrease in operating range:
•Weather conditions.
•Nearby radio towers.
•Structures around the vehicle.
•Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Note: The remote control contains sensitive
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
•You activate the front exterior door
handle switch.
•You press the luggage compartment
button.
•You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote
Control (page 48).
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If
Equipped)
E222511
Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.
48
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E138615
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
Note: A three-button remote control
operates similarly.
E138616
Your intelligent access key operates the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to activate
the push-button start system.
E142431
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable mechanical key blade that you
can use to unlock the driver door. Slide the
release on the back of the transmitter to
release the key blade, then pull the blade
out.
E138618
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
49
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
E138619
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
transmitter near the key ring to remove
the battery cover.
2. Remove the old battery.
E138620
3. Insert the new battery. Refer to the
instructions inside the transmitter for
the correct orientation of the battery.
Press the battery down to make sure
it is fully in the housing.
4. Snap the battery cover back onto the
transmitter.
Intelligent Access Key
1. Remove the backup key from the
transmitter.
E142432
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the backup key head to remove
the battery cover. Do not use the
backup key to remove the cover or you
could damage the intelligent access
key.
E138622
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
downward. Press the battery down to
make sure it is fully in the housing.
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the
transmitter and install the backup key.
50
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn sounds
and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Note: If locking was not successful or if any
door or the liftgate is open, or if the hood is
open on vehicles with a perimeter alarm or
remote start, the horn sounds twice and the
lamps do not flash.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again to switch it off.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes,
do not use remote start if your vehicle is
parked indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from outside the vehicle. The
transmitter has an extended operating
range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control
can be configured to operate when the
vehicle is remote started. See Automatic
Climate Control (page 109).
Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
remote start systems.
The remote start system does not work if:
•The ignition is on.
•The alarm system is triggered.
•You disable the feature.
•The hood is open.
•The transmission is not in park (P).
•The vehicle battery voltage is too low.
•The service engine soon indicator was
on the last time your vehicle was
driven.
Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.
E138626
The label on your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The direction indicator lamps flash
twice.
51
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the
blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch it on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 93).
Note: If you remote start your vehicle with
an intelligent access key, you must press
the START/STOP button on the instrument
panel once while applying the brake pedal
before driving your vehicle.
Remote start does not turn on the power
windows and does not automatically start
the radio.
The parking lamps remain on and the
vehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still
running to extend the run time for another
remote start duration. If the duration is set
to 10 minutes, you can extend the duration
for another 10 minutes. For example, if the
vehicle had been running from the first
remote start for five minutes, the vehicle
continues to run now for a total of 20
minutes. You can extend the engine
running time duration to a maximum of 30
minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after a vehicle shutdown.
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
parking lamps turn off.
You may have to be closer to the
vehicle than when starting due to ground
reflection and the added noise of the
running vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote start
system through the information display.
See General Information (page 93).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 69).
52
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be
activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or
admin keys. These can be used to:
•Create a MyKey.
•Program configurable MyKey settings.
•Clear all MyKey features.
When you have created a MyKey, you can
access the following information using the
information display:
•How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
•The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using any MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles with keyless start, when
both a MyKey transmitter and an admin
transmitter are present, the admin
transmitter will be recognized by the vehicle
to start the engine.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
•Belt-minder. You cannot disable this
feature. The audio system will mute
when the safety belts are not fastened.
•Early low fuel warning. The low-fuel
warning activates earlier, giving the
MyKey user more time to refuel.
•Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,
blind spot information system (BLIS)
with cross traffic alert, lane departure
warning and forward collision warning
system.
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure
certain MyKey settings when you first
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
key or restart the vehicle.
You can also change the settings
afterward with an admin key:
•A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting the cruise control.
WARNING: Do not set MyKey
maximum speed limit to a limit that will
prevent the driver from maintaining a safe
speed considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
53
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
MyKey™
•Vehicle speed minders. Once you select
a speed, it will be shown in the display
followed by an audible tone when the
set vehicle speed is exceeded.
•Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message will be shown in the
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the speed
sensitive compensated volume
(automatic volume control) feature
will be disabled.
•Always on setting. When this is
selected you will not be able to disable
the traction control system (if your
vehicle is equipped with this feature).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped with
a push-button start, hold the intelligent
access key next to the steering column.
Details on the correct fob placement and
position is in another chapter. See
Starting and Stopping the Engine (page
131).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the
information display controls, and select
Settings and then MyKey by pressing OK
or the > button.
4. Press OK or the > button to select
Create MyKey.
5. When prompted, hold the OK button
until you see a message informing you to
label this key as a MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off, open
and close the driver door and restart your
vehicle with the programmed key or
transmitter.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from
the admin keys.
You can also program configurable
settings for the key(s). Refer to
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings.
Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings:
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key or fob.
2. Access the main menu on the
information display controls, and select
Settings, then MyKey by pressing OK
or the > button.
3. Use the arrow buttons to get to a
configurable feature.
4. Press OK or > to make a selection. The
programmed restrictions apply when
you key off, open and close the driver
door and restart your vehicle with the
programmed key or transmitter.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the engine off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey
settings using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 93).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key.
54
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
MyKey™
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow button.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow button.MyKey
Press and hold the OK button until the instrument cluster
displays the following message.
Clear MyKey
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.
55
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 93).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to
access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
{0} Admin Keys
56
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
I cannot create a MyKey. •The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
•The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
•Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless
start transmitter is not placed in the backup
position. See Passive Anti-Theft System
(page 69).
•SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
•The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 54).
I cannot program the configurable
settings.
•The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 54).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
57
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 69).
I lost a key.
MyKey distances do not accumulate. •The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
•An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
•The key system has been reset.
•An admin transmitter is present at vehicle
start.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 54).
No MyKey functions with the keyless
entry transmitter.
58
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
Note: Always take your keys and lock all
doors when leaving your vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E196954
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Door Lock Indicator
An LED on the power door lock control
illuminates when you lock the door.
Remote Control
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within
three seconds to unlock all doors. The
direction indicators will flash.
With the ignition off, press and hold both
the lock and unlock buttons on the remote
control for three seconds to change
between driver door or all door unlock
mode. The direction indicators will flash
twice to indicate a change to the unlocking
mode. Driver door mode only unlocks the
driver door when you press the unlock
button once. All door mode unlocks all
doors when you press the unlock button
once. The unlocking mode applies to the
remote control, keyless entry keypad and
intelligent access.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
will flash.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors will lock again, the horn
will sound and the direction indicators will
flash if all the doors and the luggage
compartment are closed.
Mislock
If any door or the liftgate is open, or if the
hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft
alarm or remote start, the horn will sound
twice and the direction indicators will not
flash.
Opening the Liftgate
E138630
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
with the Key Blade
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
your vehicle once to lock all doors. Turn
the top of the key toward the rear of your
vehicle once to unlock the driver door only.
59
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Doors and Locks
If the central locking function does not
operate, lock the doors individually using
the key in the position shown.
E112203
Left-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock.
Opening a Rear Door from the
Inside
Pull the interior door handle twice to
unlock and open a rear door. The first pull
unlocks the door and the second pull
opens the door.
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
General Information
You can unlock and lock the vehicle
without taking the keys out of your pocket
or purse when your intelligent access key
is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
Intelligent access uses a sensor on the
back of the door handle for unlocking and
a separate sensor on the face of each door
handle for locking.
The system does not function if:
•Your vehicle battery has no charge.
•The key battery has no charge.
•The key frequencies are jammed.
Note: The system may not function if the
passive key is close to metal objects or
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell
phone.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 48).
Unlocking Using Intelligent Access
E248555
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock
sensor on the back of the door handle for
a brief period and then pull on the door
handle to unlock, being careful to not
touch the lock sensor at the same time or
pulling the door handle too quickly. The
intelligent access system requires a brief
delay to authenticate your intelligent
access key fob.
60
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Doors and Locks
Locking Using Intelligent Access
E248556
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door
handle lock sensor for approximately one
second to lock, being careful to not touch
the unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle
to confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.
At the Liftgate
Press the button located in the top of the
liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the
liftgate, and then pull on the outside
handle.
Smart Unlocks for Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (If Equipped)
This helps to prevent you from locking
yourself out of your vehicle if the key is still
in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle with the power door lock
control, all the doors will lock then unlock
and the horn will sound twice if the key is
still in the ignition.
You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by either:
•Using the keyless entry keypad with the
driver door closed.
•Pressing the lock button on the
transmitter even if the doors are not
closed.
If both front doors are closed, you can lock
your vehicle by any method, regardless of
whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
rear cargo area. When you electronically
lock your vehicle with any door open, the
transmission is in park (P) and the ignition
is off, the system searches for an intelligent
access key inside your vehicle after you
close the last door. If the system finds a
key, all of the doors will immediately
unlock and the horn will sound twice,
indicating that a key is inside.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if
the ignition is on.
Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when:
•All doors are closed.
•The ignition is on.
•You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
•Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 4 mph (7 km/h).
Autolock repeats when:
•You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
4 mph (7 km/h) or lower.
•Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 4 mph (7 km/h).
61
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Doors and Locks
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
•The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been
moving at a speed greater than 4 mph
(7 km/h).
•Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to the
accessory position.
•You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
To enable or disable autounlock, see an
authorized dealer.
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.
The illuminated entry system turns off the
lights if:
•The ignition is on.
•You press the remote control lock
button.
•After 25 seconds of illumination.
The lights will not turn off if:
•You turn them on with the lamp
control.
•Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors are closed
and you switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
•25 seconds have elapsed.
•You lock your vehicle from the outside.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)
If you leave the ignition on after leaving
your vehicle, it turns off 15 minutes after
you close all of the doors.
KEYLESS ENTRY (If Equipped)
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver
window. It is invisible until touched and
then it lights up so you can see and touch
the appropriate buttons.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
62
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Doors and Locks
E138637
You can use the keypad to:
•lock or unlock the doors
•program and erase user codes
•arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an
authorized dealer. You can also create up
to five of your own five-digit personal entry
codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
•press 3·4 to save personal code 2
•press 5·6 to save personal code 3
•press 7·8 to save personal code 4
•press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
Tips:
•Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
•Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
•The factory-set code will work even if
you have set your own personal code.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
This must be done within five seconds
of completing Step 2.
All personal codes will erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times
(35 consecutive button presses). This
mode disables the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
•one minute of keypad inactivity
•pressing the unlock button on the
remote control
•switching the ignition on
•unlocking the vehicle using intelligent
access.
63
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Doors and Locks
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps will illuminate.
Note: All doors will unlock if the two-stage
unlocking feature is disabled. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 59).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 control within five
seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time with the driver door closed. You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.
64
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Doors and Locks
MANUAL LIFTGATE (If Equipped)
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seatbelts. Make sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
properly using a seatbelt. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Make sure to close and
latch the liftgate to prevent drawing
exhaust fumes into your vehicle. This will
also prevent passengers and cargo from
falling out. If you must drive with the
liftgate open, keep the vents or windows
open so outside air comes into your vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning could result
in serious personal injury.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
Opening the Liftgate
Manually
E138632
Press the button located in the top of the
liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the
liftgate, and then pull on the outside
handle.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
Closing the Liftgate
E155976
A handle is located inside the liftgate to
help with closing.
65
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Liftgate
POWER LIFTGATE (If Equipped)
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seatbelts. Make sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
properly using a seatbelt. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Make sure to close and
latch the liftgate to prevent drawing
exhaust fumes into your vehicle. This will
also prevent passengers and cargo from
falling out. If you must drive with the
liftgate open, keep the vents or windows
open so outside air comes into your vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning could result
in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Keep keys out of reach
of children. Do not allow children to
operate or play near an open or moving
power liftgate. You should supervise the
operation of the power liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
Three warning tones sound once as the
liftgate begins to power close. Five short
chimes indicate a problem with the open
or close request, caused by:
•The ignition is on and the transmission
is not in park (P).
•The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
•The vehicle speed is at or above 1 mph
(1 km/h)
If the liftgate starts to close after it has
fully opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a
possible strut failure. A repetitive chime
sounds and the liftgate closes under
control. Remove any excessive weight
from the liftgate. If the liftgate continues
to close after opening, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure all persons
are clear of the power liftgate area before
using the power liftgate control.
Note: Make sure the area behind your
vehicle is free from obstruction and that
there is enough room for you to operate the
liftgate.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when
you are driving. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
From the Instrument Panel
E138633
With the transmission in Park,
press the button on the
instrument panel.
66
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Liftgate
Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
Outside Control Button
Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
E138632
2. Press and release the liftgate control
button.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction, replicate
a strut failure, or damage mechanical
components.
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING: Keep clear of the liftgate
when using the rear switch.
E138636
Press and release the liftgate control
button.
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force
to the liftgate while it is in motion. This
could damage the power liftgate and its
components.
You can stop the liftgate movement by
doing any of the following:
•Pressing the liftgate control button.
•Pressing the liftgate button on the
remote control twice.
•Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
•Moving your foot under and away from
the center rear bumper in a single-kick
motion.*
*This method only works for vehicles with
the hands-free liftgate feature.
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate by pressing the control
button on the liftgate when it reaches
the desired height.
Note: When the liftgate has stopped
moving, you can also manually move it to
the desired height.
67
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Liftgate
3. Press and hold the liftgate control
button on the liftgate until a tone
sounds, indicating programming is
complete.
Note: You can only use the liftgate control
button to program the height.
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the
power liftgate, you can manually move it
to a different height. You can fully open
the liftgate by manually pushing it upward
to the maximum open position.
Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height, even if you disconnect
the battery.
Obstacle Detection
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. Two short tones sound and the
system reverses to open. When you
remove the obstacle, you can power close
the liftgate.
Note: Entering your vehicle while the
liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to
bounce and activate obstacle detection. To
prevent this, let the power liftgate close
completely before you enter your vehicle.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
open while driving.
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and two short tones sound.
When you remove the obstacle, you can
continue to operate the liftgate.
Hands-Free Feature
Make sure you have an intelligent access
transmitter within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.
E239081
1. Move your foot under and away from
the rear bumper detection area in a
single-kick motion. Do not move your
foot sideways or the sensors may not
detect the motion. Kick between the
exhaust and hitch if your vehicle is
equipped with a hitch.
2. The liftgate will power open or close.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction, replicate
a strut failure, or damage mechanical
components.
Note: Splashing water may cause the
hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the
intelligent access key away from the rear
bumper detection area when washing your
vehicle.
68
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Liftgate
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system is an engine immobilization
system. It is designed to help prevent the
engine from being started unless a coded
key programmed to your vehicle is used.
Using the wrong key may prevent the
engine from starting. A message may
appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in
the information display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms the vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with
two integrated keyhead transmitters or two
intelligent access keys.
The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key
that operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, as well as a remote control.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent
access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.
If your programmed transmitters or
standard SecuriLock coded keys
(integrated keyhead transmitters only) are
lost or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
Note: You can program a maximum of eight
coded keys to your vehicle. All eight can be
integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This
procedure will program both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
69
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Security
You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See
your authorized dealer to have the spare
key programmed if two previously
programmed coded keys are not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully
programmed it will start the engine and
operate the remote entry system (if the
new key is an integrated keyhead
transmitter).
If programming was not successful, wait
10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
See your authorized dealer to have
additional keys programmed to your
vehicle.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage
compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in the ignition. Electronically lock
the vehicle to arm the alarm.
The message indicator flashes
when theft protection is active.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
•Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad.
•Switch the ignition on or start the
vehicle.
•Use a key in the driver’s door to unlock
the vehicle, then switch the ignition on
within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
70
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 116).
E259854
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E259855
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL
Select the required source on the audio
unit.
You can operate the following functions
with the control:
Type One
E187452
Volume up.A
Seek up or next.B
Volume down.C
Seek down or previous.D
71
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Steering Wheel
Type Two
E201115
Volume up.A
Seek up or next.B
Volume down.C
Seek down or previous.D
Press to select source.E
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
•Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
•Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
•Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
•Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL
E186744
Press to select or deselect voice control.
CRUISE CONTROL
Type One
E144500
See Using Cruise Control (page 182).
72
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Steering Wheel
Type Two
E223551
See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 183).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E188902
See General Information (page 93).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If
Equipped)
Switch the heated steering wheel on and
off using the touchscreen.
Touch the button to switch the
heated steering wheel on and
off.
Note: You can use the heated steering
wheel only when the engine is running.
Note: The system uses a sensor and is
designed to control the temperature of the
steering wheel and to prevent it from
overheating.
Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.
73
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Steering Wheel
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
E270969
Push the lever up or down to
operate the windshield wiper.
E197525
Single wipe.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Normal wipe.C
High speed wipe.D
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure that you switch the
windshield wipers off before entering a car
wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
Intermittent Wipe
E197526
Shortest wipe interval.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Longest wipe interval.C
Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
74
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wipers and Washers
E197526
High sensitivity.A
On.B
Low sensitivity.C
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a large amount
of water on the windshield. When you
select high sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a small amount
of water on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.
In these conditions, you can do the
following:
•Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
•Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
•Switch autowipers off.
Autowipers Settings
Autowipers default to on and remain on
until you switch it off in the information
display. When you switch off autowipers,
the wipers operate in intermittent mode.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
E197528
E270967
Pull the lever toward you to
operate the windshield washers.
When you release the lever, the wipers
operate for a short time. When activated,
a courtesy wipe occurs a short time after
the wipers stop to clear any remaining
washer fluid.
Note: You can switch courtesy wipe on or
off in the information display See
Information Messages (page 96).
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This could
cause the washer pump to overheat.
Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Operating the windshield washer also turns
on the front camera washer.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
75
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wipers and Washers
E171615
Intermittent wipe.A
Low speed wipe.B
Off.C
Depending on your vehicle, when you
switch on the front wipers and move the
gearshift lever to reverse (R), the rear
intermittent wipe may turn on.
Rear Window Washer
E167407
Push the lever away from you to operate
the rear window washer.
When you release the lever, wiping
continues for a short period of time.
76
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
•The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
•A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
•A water puddle inside the lamp.
•Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
Lamps off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
tail lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
Headlamp High Beam
E162679
Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
77
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Lighting
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam
E162680
Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may need
to override the system if it does not turn
the headlamps on in low visibility
conditions, for example daytime fog.
E142451
When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps turn
on in low light situations, or when the
wipers turn on.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
•During a single wipe.
•When using the windshield washers.
•If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
E231828
78
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Lighting
Press repeatedly or press and hold until
you reach the desired level.
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You
will hear a short tone. The headlamps will
switch off automatically after three
minutes with any door open or 30 seconds
after the last door has been closed. You
can cancel this feature by pulling the
direction indicator toward you again or
switching the ignition on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.
Type One - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. Switching the ignition on.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions,
or releasing the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
Type Two - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 93).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The lamps are on in the information
display.
2. Switching the ignition on.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions,
or releasing the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not turn on the daytime running lamps.
If the daytime running lamps are off in the
information display, the lamps stay off in
all switch positions.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may need
to override the system if it does not turn
the high beams on or off.
The system turns on high beams if it is dark
enough and no other traffic is present. If it
detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting
ahead, the system turns off high beams
before they can distract other road users.
Low beams remain on.
Note: The system may not operate properly
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield
free from obstruction or damage.
79
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Lighting
Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message may
appear in the information display if the
camera is blocked.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to turn
the high beams on and off.
Once the system is active, the high beams
turn on if:
•The ambient light level is low enough.
•There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle.
•The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (51 km/h).
The high beams turn off if:
•The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
•The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
•The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
•The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
•The camera is blocked.
Switching the System On and Off
Switch the system on using the information
display. See Information Displays (page
93).
E142451
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position. See Autolamps
(page 78).
Overriding the System
When you switch on the high beams,
pushing or pulling the stalk provides a
temporary override to low beam.
Automatic High Beam Indicator (If
Equipped)
The indicator lamp illuminates
to confirm when the system is
ready to assist.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped)
E142453
Press the control to switch the fog lamps
on or off.
80
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Lighting
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except
Off and the high beams are not on.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E162681
Push the lever up or down to use the
direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
•You open any door.
•You press a remote control button.
Front Interior Lamps
E181171
A. Individual lamp.
B. Individual lamp.
Rear Interior Lamps (If Equipped)
A
E142455
Press the button to switch the lamps on
or off.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
Use the touchscreen to select the
following:
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
E279027
Select ambient lighting.
81
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Lighting
E273192
Switching Ambient Lighting On
Touch a color once.
Changing the Color
Touch any color once.
Adjusting the Brightness
Drag the selected color up or down.
Switching Ambient Lighting Off
Touch the selected color once or drag the
selected color down to zero brightness.
82
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not let
them play with the power windows. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the power
windows, verify they are free of obstruction
and make sure that children and pets are
not in the proximity of the window
openings.
Press the control to open the
window. Lift the control to close
the window.
To reduce wind noise or pulsing noise when
just one window is open, slightly open the
opposite window.
One-Touch Open (If Equipped)
Fully press the control and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Close (If Equipped)
Fully lift the control and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
Rear Window Lock
Press the control to lock or
unlock the rear window controls.
It illuminates when you lock the
rear window controls.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped)
The window stops and reverses if it detects
an obstruction.
Overriding Bounce-Back
WARNING: If you override
bounce-back, the window does not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal
injury or damage to your vehicle.
Proceed as follows to override this
protection feature when there is a
resistance, for example in winter:
1. Close the window twice until it reaches
the point of resistance and let it
reverse.
2. Close the window a third time to the
point of resistance. You disabled the
bounce-back feature and you can now
close the window manually. The
window goes past the point of
resistance and you can fully close it.
Note: If the window does not close, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Resetting Bounce-Back
WARNING: Bounce-back is off until
you reset the memory. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal
injury or damage to your vehicle.
If you have disconnected the battery, you
must reset the bounce-back memory
separately for each window.
1. Lift and hold the switch until the
window is fully closed.
2. Release the switch.
3. Lift and hold the switch again for a few
seconds.
4. Release the switch.
5. Lift and hold the switch again for a few
seconds.
6. Release the switch.
83
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
7. Press and hold the switch until the
window is fully open.
8. Lift and hold the switch until the
window is fully closed.
9. Release the switch.
10. Open the window and then try to
close it using one-touch close.
Note: Repeat the procedure if the window
does not close when you use one-touch.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window controls for
several minutes after switching off the
ignition or until opening either front door.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
E70846
AC
B
Left-hand mirrorA
OffB
Right-hand mirrorC
E70847
Press the arrows to adjust the mirror.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
114).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 121).
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing will blink when you switch on the
turn signal.
Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.
84
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Objects in the mirror are
closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated
convex mirror built into the upper outboard
corner of the exterior mirrors. They are
designed to increase your visibility along
the side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror.
If no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane
is at a safe distance, signal that you intend
to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder
to verify traffic is clear and carefully
change lanes.
A
B
C
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the
main mirror when it is at a distance. The
image becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image will
transition from the main mirror and begin
to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle will
transition to your peripheral field of view
as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 195).
INTERIOR MIRROR
Manual Dimming Mirror
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce the effect of bright light from
behind.
Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
bright light from behind. It returns to
normal when the bright light from behind
is no longer present or if you shift into
reverse (R).
Do not block the sensors on the front and
back of the mirror.
85
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear
center head restraint could prevent light
from reaching the sensor.
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not let children play
with the moonroof or leave them
unattended in the vehicle. They may
seriously hurt themselves.
WARNING: When closing the
moonroof, you should verify that it is free
of obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.
The moonroof and sunscreen controls are
located on the overhead console.
The moonroof and sunscreen have a
one-touch open and close feature. To stop
them during one-touch operation, press
the control a second time.
Opening and Closing the
Sunscreen
E138668
Press and release the rear of the control
to open the sunscreen.
Press and release the front of the control
to close the sunscreen. If it is open, the
moonroof will automatically close before
the sunscreen closes.
86
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E138669
Press and release the rear of the control
to open the moonroof. If it is closed, the
sunscreen will automatically open before
the moonroof opens. The moonroof will
stop short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Press and hold the
control again to fully open the moonroof.
Press and release the front of the control
to close the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically
while closing. It will reverse some distance
if there is an obstacle in the way.
Press and hold the front of the control
within two seconds of a bounce-back
event to override this function. While
bounce-back is active, the closing force
increases for each of the next three times
that you close the moonroof.
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the front of the control
to vent the moonroof. Press and release
the rear of the control to close the
moonroof.
Note: When you vent the moonroof it will
rise to 1.57 in (4 cm) and then lower slightly.
This is normal. You cannot stop the
moonroof in the higher position.
87
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
E171213
Information displayA
SpeedometerB
Engine coolant temperature
gauge
C
Fuel gaugeD
TachometerE
Information Display
Compass (If Equipped)
Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.
To calibrate and set the compass zone use
the information display menu. See
Information Displays (page 93).
Use the diagram to determine your
magnetic zone.
123
4
5
6 7 8 9 1011
12
13
14
15
E142800
88
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display, it registers the accumulated
distance your vehicle has traveled.
Outside Air Temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
Trip Computer
See Trip Computer (page 96).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 93).
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
cooling system to cool down. Cover the
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
prevent the possibility of scalding and
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
At normal operating temperature, the
needle will remain in the center section.
Note: Do not restart the engine until the
cause of overheating has been resolved.
If the needle enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the engine,
switch the ignition off and determine the
cause once the engine has cooled down.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 250).
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates about how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty
reaches 50 mi (80 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 35 mi (60 km), 25 mi
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and operate the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system
indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system
is in. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 183).
On (white light): Illuminates when you
switch on the adaptive cruise control
system. Turns off when you switch off the
speed control system.
89
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
you engage the adaptive cruise control
system. Turns off when you disengage the
speed control system.
Airbag - Front
E67017
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue
to have the normal braking system
(without ABS) unless the brake system
warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the
system checked by your authorized dealer.
Auto Start-Stop (If Equipped)
It illuminates to inform you when
the engine shuts down or in
conjunction with a message.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
E124823
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature off or in conjunction
with a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 195). See
Information Messages (page 96).
Brake System
WARNING: Driving your vehicle with
the warning lamp on is dangerous. A
significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
E138644
It will illuminate when you
engage the parking brake with
the ignition on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If
the parking brake is not engaged, this
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system malfunction. Have the system
checked immediately by your authorized
dealer.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature on. See Using
Cruise Control (page 182).
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right
turn signal or the hazard warning
flasher is turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for
a burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 260).
Electric Park Brake
E146190
Illuminates or flashes when the
electric parking brake has a
malfunction. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 161).
90
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 248).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Seatbelt
E71880
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten
your seatbelt. See Seatbelt
Reminder (page 35).
Fog Lamps - Front (If Equipped)
It will illuminate when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
High Beam
It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Information (If Equipped)
It will illuminate when a new
message is stored in the
information display. It will be red
or amber in color depending on the severity
of the message and will remain on until the
cause of the message has been rectified.
See Information Messages (page 96).
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel
level is low or the fuel tank is
nearly empty. Refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check your tire
pressure as soon as possible.
It will also illuminate momentarily when
you switch the ignition on to confirm the
lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate
when you switch the ignition on, or begins
to flash at any time, have the system
checked by your authorized dealer.
Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on.
Service Engine Soon
If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a
malfunction. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected a
malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system.
If it flashes, engine misfire may be
occurring. Increased exhaust gas
temperatures could damage the catalytic
converter or other vehicle components.
Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration) and have
your vehicle immediately serviced.
It illuminates when you switch the ignition
on prior to engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether your vehicle is
ready for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) testing.
91
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Emission Law (page 147).
Traction and Stability Control
E138639
It will flash when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the
system will switch off. Have the system
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately.
Traction and Stability Control Off
E130458
It illuminates when you switch
the system off. It will go out
when you switch the system
back on or when you switch the ignition
off.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime (If
Equipped)
Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.
Engine On Warning Chime
A warning chime will sound when any door
is opened if the vehicle exceeds a relatively
low speed.
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Sounds the horn twice when you exit the
vehicle and the keyless vehicle is in RUN,
indicating the vehicle is still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by your authorized dealer
immediately.
Automatic Transmission Warning
Chime
Sounds when you have not moved the
transmission selector lever to position P.
A message will be shown in the display.
92
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display
controls on the steering wheel. The
information display shows the
corresponding information.
Information Display Controls
E184819
•Press the up or down arrow button to
scroll through and highlight the options
within a menu.
•Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
•Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
•Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
•Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages. The OK
button may also be used to reset some
Trip values.
E204495
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A
check in the box indicates the
feature is enabled, and unchecked
indicates the feature is disabled.
Menu Structure - Information
Display
All Vehicles
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
93
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Trip 1 and 21
All Value - Distance to E, Trip Odometer, Instantaneous Fuel and Average Fuel
Speed
Trip Odometer
Ford EcoModeAverage Fuel
Anticipation
Speed
Inst Fuel Econ
Distance to E
Trip Timer
Option to select for navigation display
1 See Trip Computer (page 96).
Information
Seatbelt
Auto StartStop
Driver Alert
Intelligent 4WD
MyKey
MyKey Info
System Check
Settings
Traction CtrlDriver Assist
Blindspot
Enter the submenu and select
your setting
Collision Warn
Cross Traffic
94
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Enter the submenu and select your settingCruise Control
Driver Alert
Tire Monitor
Enter the submenu and select
your setting
Lane Keeping
Enter the submenu and select
your setting
AlarmVehicle
Auto Engine Off
Enter the submenu and select your settingCompass
Chimes
Easy Entry/Exit
Enter the submenu and select your settingLighting
Oil Life Reset
Enter the submenu and select your settingRemote Start
Wipers
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKeyMyKey
Enter the submenu and select your settingTraction Ctrl
Max Speed
Speed Warning
Volume Limiter
Enter the submenu and select your settingDo Not Disturb
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Navigation infoDisplay
Enter the submenu and select your settingLanguage
Vehicle graphic
Enter the submenu and select your settingDistance
Temperature
95
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
System Check
All active warnings will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment
options and current vehicle status. Use the
up/down arrow buttons to scroll through
the list.
TRIP COMPUTER
Resetting the Trip Computer
Press and hold OK on the current screen
to reset the respective trip distance, time,
average fuel and average speed
information.
Distance to E
Indicates the approximate distance the
vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in
the tank. Changes in driving pattern may
cause the value to vary.
Trip Odometer
Registers the distance traveled of
individual journeys.
Trip Timer
Registers the time of individual journeys.
Instantaneous Fuel (If Equipped)
Shows your instantaneous fuel usage.
Average Fuel
Indicates the average fuel consumption
since the function was last reset.
Digital Speedo
Shows a digital display of your vehicle
speed.
All Value (If Equipped)
Indicates all the respective remaining fuel,
distance, instantaneous fuel and average
fuel information.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages display or are available.
Additionally, the information display may
abbreviate or shorten certain messages.
E184814
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. The information
display automatically removes other
messages after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
Message Indicator (If Equipped)
The message indicator
illuminates to supplement some
messages. It is red or amber
depending on the severity of the message
and remains on until you or your authorized
dealer have fixed the vehicle concern.
A system specific symbol with a message
indicator may supplement some
messages.
96
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Airbag
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays when the system requires service due
to a malfunction. Contact your authorized
dealer.
AmberAirbag fault Service now
Alarm
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays when the alarm has been triggered
due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 70).
AmberAlarm Activated Check
Vehicle
Displays when the system requires service due
to a malfunction. Contact your authorized
dealer.
-Alarm fault Service
required
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays when the engine has shut off to help
increase fuel economy.
-Engine Shut Off For Fuel
Economy
Displays when the engine is getting ready to
shut off. You can press OK on the left steering
wheel button to override the shut down.
-Engine Shuts Off in
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds Press Ok to
Override
97
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Auto Start-Stop
Action
Message
Indicator
Message
Switch the ignition off before leaving your
vehicle if the system has shut down the engine.
See Auto-Start-Stop (page 137).
Red
Auto StartStop Switch
ignition off
Have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
Amber
Auto StartStop
malfunction Service
required
The engine needs to be restarted, press the
clutch pedal to start. See Auto-Start-Stop
(page 137).
-
Auto StartStop Press a
Pedal to Start Engine
Select neutral for the system to restart the
engine. See Auto-Start-Stop (page 137).
-
Auto StartStop Select
Neutral To Start Engine
The system is not functioning. A manual restart
is required.
-
Auto StartStop Manual
Restart Required
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so
and switch off the ignition. Contact your
authorized dealer.
RedElectrical System Over-
voltage Stop Safely
Displays to warn of a low battery condition.
Turn off all unneeded electrical accessories.
Contact your authorized dealer.
AmberBattery Low See Manual
98
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displayed when the blind spot information
system and cross traffic alert system sensors
are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 195).
AmberBlindspot Low visibility
See manual
Displayed when a fault with the system has
occurred. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
AmberBLIS: X sensor fault
Service required
Displayed when the system is not available due
to trailer use. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 195).
AmberBlindspot Not Available
Trailer Attached
Displayed when the system detects a vehicle.
See Cross Traffic Alert (page 196).
AmberCross Traffic Vehicle
coming from X
Displayed when the blind spot information
system and cross traffic alert system sensors
are blocked. See Cross Traffic Alert (page
196).
AmberCross Traffic Sensor
blocked See manual
Displays when the system requires service due
to a malfunction. Contact your authorized
dealer.
AmberCross Traffic fault
Service required
Displayed when the system is not available due
to trailer use. See Cross Traffic Alert (page
196).
-Cross traffic disabled
Trailer attached
99
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Collision Warning and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ActionIndicatorMessage
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather,
ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor. You
can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 183).
Amber
Front radar sensor
blocked See manual
A condition exists that the system cannot function
properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 183).
Amber
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AmberCollision Warning Fault
Service Required
A condition exists that the system cannot function
properly. See Collision Warning System (page
199).
Amber
Collision Warning Not
Available
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AmberCollision Warning Fault
Service Required
Doors
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays when the door(s) listed is not
completely closed and the vehicle is moving.
RedX door open
Displays when the door(s) listed is not
completely closed.
-
Displays when the luggage compartment is not
completely closed and the vehicle is moving.
RedTrunk Ajar
Displays when the luggage compartment is not
completely closed.
-
Displays when the hood is not completely
closed and the vehicle is moving.
RedHood Ajar
Displays when the hood is not completely
closed.
-
100
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Engine
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Engine service is required. Contact your
authorized dealer.
AmberEngine fault Service now
Displays when the engine temperature is too
high. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and allow
to engine to cool. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized dealer. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 250).
RedHigh Engine Temper-
ature Stop Safely
Displays when the engine has reduced power
in order to help reduce high coolant temper-
ature.
-Power Reduced to
Lower Engine Temp
Four-Wheel Drive
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
The system is not functioning correctly and
defaulted to front-wheel drive. See your
authorized dealer. See Using Four-Wheel
Drive (page 155).
Amber4WD fault Service
required
Displays when the system disables automatic-
ally and enters front-wheel drive only mode to
protect driveline components. See Using Four-
Wheel Drive (page 155).
Amber4WD Off
The system has overheated and defaulted to
front-wheel drive. See Using Four-Wheel
Drive (page 155).
Amber4WD temporarily
disabled
Displays when system operation has been
restored. See Using Four-Wheel Drive (page
155).
-4WD restored
101
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Hill Start Assist
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays when hill start assist is not available.
Contact your authorized dealer. See Hill Start
Assist (page 163).
AmberHill Start Assist Not
Available
Keyless Vehicle
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays to remind you that the key is in the
trunk. See Keyless Starting (page 131).
AmberFord KeyFree Key inside
vehicle
Displayed if the key is not detected by the
system. See Keyless Starting (page 131).
-Ford KeyFree No key
detected
Displayed as a reminder to turn off the vehicle.
See Keyless Starting (page 131).
RedSwitch ign. off Press
ENGINE Start/Stop
button
Displayed as a reminder to press the brake
while starting the vehicle.
-Press brake to start
Displayed when a valid key is not detected
within the vehicle. See Keyless Starting (page
131).
RedFord KeyFree Key not
inside car
Displays when the key battery is low. Change
the battery as soon as possible. See Remote
Control (page 48).
-Key Battery Low Replace
Soon
102
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Lighting
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays when the brake lamp bulb has burned
out. Contact your authorized dealer.
-Brake Lamp Bulb Fault
Displays when the low beam headlamp bulb
has burned out. Contact your authorized dealer.
-Low Beam Bulb Fault
Displays when an electrical system problem
occurs with the headlamp system. Contact your
authorized dealer.
AmberHeadlamp fault Service
required
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays when the engine oil life is depleted and
requires a change. See Engine Oil Check
(page 248).
-Engine oil change due
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the
brake system should be inspected immediately.
See Brake Fluid Check (page 254).
RedBrake fluid level low
Service now
MyKey
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays when MyKey is active.-MyKey active Drive
Safely
Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey
is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on.
-MyKey Speed Limited to
XX MPH/km/h
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey
speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is
approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
AmberMyKey Vehicle Near Top
Speed
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey
speed limit is reached.
AmberMyKey Vehicle at Top
Speed
103
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays when MyKey is active.-MyKey Check Speed
Drive Safely
Displays when a MyKey is in use and seatbelt
reminder is activated.
-MyKey Buckle Up to
Unmute Audio
Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is
activated.
-MyKey Park aid cannot
be deactivated
Displays when trying to create a MyKey with a
key already designated as a MyKey.
-Key is Already a MyKey
Displays when you are programming a MyKey.-Hold key next to symbol
on steering column
Displays when you are programming a MyKey.-MyKey ESC cannot be
deactivated
Park Aid
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays when the system has detected a
condition that requires service. Contact your
authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation
(page 168).
AmberParking aid malfunction
Service required
Park Brake
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays when the parking brake is set, the
engine is running and the vehicle is driven more
than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on
after the parking brake is released, contact your
authorized dealer.
RedPark brake applied
104
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Power Steering
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
The power steering system is not working. Stop
the vehicle a safe place. Contact your author-
ized dealer.
RedSteering loss Stop safely
The power steering system is not working. Stop
the vehicle a safe place. Contact your author-
ized dealer.
AmberSteering assist fault
Service required
The power steering system has detected a
condition within the power steering system or
passive entry or passive start system requires
service. Contact your authorized dealer.
AmberSteering fault Service
now
Remote Start
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays as a reminder that the engine is
running after a remote start.
AmberRemote Start Active
Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and
press the Start/Stop button to start your engine
when you have used the remote start.
AmberPress Brake and ENGINE
Start/Stop
Starting System
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder
to apply the brake.
-Press brake to start
Displays when the vehicle fails to start.-Cranking time exceeded
105
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle
have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 291).
AmberTire Pressure Low
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring
system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monit-
oring System (page 291).
AmberTire Pressure Monitor
Fault
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is
malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 291).
AmberTire Pressure Sensor
Fault
Traction Control
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays when the traction control system has
been switched off. See Using Traction
Control (page 165).
-Traction Control Off
Trailer
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
Displays when the trailer sway control has
detected a trailer sway. See Trailer Sway
Control (page 210).
-Trailer Sway Reduce
Speed
106
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
Transmission
ActionMessage
Indicator
Message
See your authorized dealer.-Transmission malfunc-
tion Service now
The transmission is overheating and needs to
cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it’s
possible.
AmberTransmission Over
Temperature Stop
Safely
See your authorized dealer.AmberTransmission Service
Required
Transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool
or speed up.
-Transmission Hot Stop
or Speed Up
Transmission is hot. Wait as needed to let it
cool.
-Transmission Hot Wait
<XX> mins
Displays as a reminder to shift into park.-Transmission not in Park
Select P
Displays to request the operator to apply the
brake as needed by the transmission.
-Press brake to unlock
gearshift lever
Displays when the transmission shift lever is
unlocked and free to select gears.
-Gearshift lever unlocked
107
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Information Displays
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E222397
Fan speed control: Adjusts the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
A
A/C: Press to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.
B
Air distribution control: Press
to switch air flow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or
footwell vents on or off. You can
distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
C
Note: At least one of these
buttons illuminates on when the
system is on.
Heated rear window: Press to
switch the heated rear window
on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page
114).
D
Temperature control: Adjusts
the temperature of the air
circulated in your vehicle.
E
MAX Defrost: Turn to the right
to switch on defrost. Air flows
through the windshield vents
and the fan adjusts to the
highest speed. You can also use
this setting to defog and clear
the windshield of a thin covering
of ice. The heated rear window
also turns on when you select
maximum defrost.
F
Note: To prevent window
fogging, you cannot select
recirculated air when maximum
defrost is on.
MAX A/C: Turn to the left for
maximum cooling. Recirculated
air flows through the instrument
panel vents and the air
conditioning turns on.
G
108
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
Note: In certain conditions (for
example, maximum defrost), the
air conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even though
you switch off the air
conditioning.
Recirculated air: Press to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently
in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This may reduce the
time needed to cool the interior
(when used with A/C) and
reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
H
Note: Recirculated air may turn
off (or prevent you from
switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging.
Recirculation may also turn on
and off in Panel or Panel/Floor
air flow modes during hot
weather in order to improve
cooling efficiency.
Heated seats: Press to switch
the heated seats on and off. See
Heated Seats (page 123).
I
Power: Press to switch the
system on and off. When the
system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.
J
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
E222398
109
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
AUTO: Press to switch on
automatic operation. Adjust to
select the desired temperature.
Fan speed, air distribution, air
conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air adjust
to heat or cool the vehicle to
maintain the desired
temperature.
A
Fan speed control: Adjusts the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
B
Climate control display:
Shows the temperature settings
and fan speed.
C
Air distribution control: Press
to switch air flow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or
footwell vents on or off. You can
distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
D
Heated rear window: Press to
switch the heated rear window
on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page
114).
E
A/C: Press to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.
F
Note: In certain conditions, for
example, maximum defrost, the
air conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even though
you switch off the air
conditioning.
Passenger temperature
control: Adjusts the
temperature setting on the
passenger side.
G
Recirculated air: Press to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently
in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This may reduce the
time needed to cool the interior,
when used with A/C, and reduce
unwanted odors from entering
your vehicle.
H
Note: Recirculated air may turn
off, or prevent you from
switching on, in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging.
Recirculation may also turn on
and off in Panel or Panel/Floor
air flow modes during hot
weather to improve cooling
efficiency.
Heated seats: Press to switch
the heated seats on and off. See
Heated Seats (page 123).
I
MAX A/C: Press for maximum
cooling. The driver and
passenger settings set to LO,
recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air
conditioning turns on and the fan
adjusts to the highest speed.
J
MAX Defrost: Press to switch
on defrost. The driver and
passenger settings set to HI, air
flows through the windshield
vents, and the fan adjusts to the
highest speed. You can also use
this setting to defog and clear
the windshield of a thin covering
of ice. The heated rear window
also turns on when you select
maximum defrost.
K
Note: To prevent window
fogging, you cannot select
recirculated air when maximum
defrost is on.
110
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
Power: Press to switch the
system on and off. When the
system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.
L
Driver temperature control:
Adjusts the temperature setting
on the driver side. This control
also adjusts the passenger side
temperature when you switch
off dual zone mode.
M
Single Zone Temperature Control
In this mode, the climate control system
links the temperature settings for both the
driver side and passenger side. If you adjust
the setting using the rotary control on the
driver side, the system adjusts the
passenger temperature to the same
setting.
Dual Zone Temperature Control
Select a temperature for the passenger
side using the rotary control on the
passenger side. Single zone temperature
control automatically turns off. The
temperature on the driver side remains
unchanged. You can now adjust the driver
and passenger side temperatures
independently. The display shows the
temperature settings for each side.
You can switch off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding AUTO for more than
two seconds.
Switching Back to Single Zone
Temperature Control
Press and hold AUTO. The passenger side
temperature adjusts to the driver side
temperature setting.
Smart Zone (If Equipped)
If you were previously in dual zone
operation and there is not an occupant in
the front passenger seat, the climate
control system may default to single zone
to improve fuel economy. When this
occurs, dual zone turns off and the
passenger set point changes to match the
driver set point.
Adjust the passenger set point normally if
you desire dual zone operation without a
passenger present. The system remains in
dual zone operation until you switch the
vehicle off.
You can disable or re-enable the Smart
Zone feature by pressing and holding
AUTO for more than four seconds. Both
set point displays begin flashing to signify
when the feature disables. The system
returns to previous state after you release
AUTO.
To re-enable the Smart Zone feature, press
and hold AUTO for more than four
seconds. Only the driver set point display
begins flashing to signify when you
re-enable the feature. The climate control
system returns to the previous state after
you release AUTO.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
111
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Manual Climate Control
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
Fan speed may also reduce until the air
cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior
Automatic climate controlManual climate control
Press AUTO.Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting.
2
Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.
3
112
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Heating
Automatic climate controlManual climate control
Press AUTO.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
2
Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.
3
Quickly Cooling the Interior
Automatic climate controlManual climate control
Select MAX A/C.Select MAX A/C.1
Drive with the windows open until you
feel cold air through the air vents.
2
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Automatic climate controlManual climate control
Press AUTO.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
2
Direct air to the instrument panel using
the air distribution buttons.
3
113
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather
Automatic climate controlManual climate control
Press the defrost button.Direct air to the windshield using the air
distribution buttons.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Press A/C.2
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
3
Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
4
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS
Note: Make sure the vehicle is running
before operating the heated windows.
Heated Rear Window
E72507
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice
and fog. The heated rear
window automatically turns off after a
short period of time. Press the button
again to switch it off.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors
automatically turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
Windshield Wiper De-icer (If Equipped)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the windshield wiper de-icer
automatically turns on.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
•It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
•It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
•It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
114
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 455).
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
REMOTE START (If Equipped)
The system adjusts the interior
temperature depending on your chosen
settings during remote start.
You cannot adjust the climate control
setting during remote start operation.
When you switch the ignition on, the
climate control system returns to the
previous settings. You can now make
adjustments.
You need to switch on certain
vehicle-dependent features, such as:
•Heated seats.
•Heated steering wheel.
•Heated mirrors.
•Heated rear window.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls.
Automatic Settings
You can set the system to operate in AUTO
mode through the information display. The
system sets the interior temperature to
72°F (22°C).
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated rear window and
heated mirrors automatically turn on.
Previous Settings
You can set the system to operate using
your previous settings prior to switching
the vehicle off through the information
display. See Information Displays (page
93).
115
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the
seatback as this can cause the occupant
to slide under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects
higher than the seatback to reduce the risk
of serious injury in the event of a crash or
during heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
•Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
•Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
•Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
•Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
•Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
•Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
•Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of
neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not
adjust the head restraint when your vehicle
is moving.
116
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Seats
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it should
be installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the
head restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
WARNING: Adjust the head
restraints for all passengers before you
drive your vehicle. This will help minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash. Do not adjust the head restraints
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front seat head restraint
E138642
Rear seat outboard head restraints
E138643
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Fold buttonE
Rear center head restraint
E187325
117
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Seats
The rear center head restraint consists of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
C
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Folding the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button E.
2. Pull the head restraint back up to reset.
Tilting Head Restraints
The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.
MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control of
your vehicle.
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
WARNING: Make sure the seat fully
locks into place by rocking it backward and
forward.
118
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Seats
E163870
Adjusting the Seat Height (If Equipped)
E163871
Adjusting the Seat Backrest
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.
E163872
POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver's
seat or seatback when your vehicle is
moving. Adjusting your seatback while your
vehicle is in motion may cause loss of
control of your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
119
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Seats
E138647
120
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Seats
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
E138648
MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
WARNING: Before activating the
memory seat, make sure that the area
immediately surrounding the seat is clear
of obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
WARNING: Do not use the memory
function when your vehicle is moving.
This function automatically recalls the
position of the following:
•Driver seat.
•Power mirrors.
The memory control is on the driver door.
E142554
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired memory
button until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to three memory position
presets. You can save a memory preset at
any time.
Recalling a Pre-Set Position
Press and release the memory button
associated with your desired driving
position. The memory features move to
the position stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall a preset memory
position when you switch the ignition off, or
when the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N) (and your vehicle is not moving)
if you switch the ignition on.
You can also recall a preset memory
position by:
•Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access keyfob if it is linked
to a preset position.
•Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
•Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Keyless
Entry (page 62).
121
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Seats
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
adjustment control (or any memory button)
during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key Fob
You can save preset memory positions for
up to three remote controls or intelligent
access (IA) keys.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit
feature, it automatically moves the driver
seat position rearward up to 2 in (5 cm)
when you switch the ignition off.
The driver seat will return to its previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature in
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 93).
REAR SEATS
E155554
Folding the Seatback
With the seat empty, pull the lever up to
fold the seatback forward. You may need
to fold the outboard head restraints and
lower the center head restraint first.
Unfolding the Seatback
Pull the seatback upward to unfold the
seatback.
Recline Adjustment (If Equipped)
With the seat occupied, pull the lever up
to recline the seatback.
122
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Seats
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING: People who are unable
to feel pain to their skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
•Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146941
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
Warmer settings are indicated by more
indicator lights.
123
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNING: Make sure that the
garage door and security device are free
from obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNING: Do not use the system
with any garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse feature
as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
E188211
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. You can program garage doors as
well as entry gate operators, security
systems, entry door locks and home or
office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your in-vehicle
HomeLink function button with your
hand-held transmitter.
Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
may need to erase your HomeLink buttons.
See Erasing the Function Button Codes.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This helps ensure quicker
training and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
124
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E188212
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, switch your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Press and release the function button
that you would like to program.
3. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
4. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button you want to
program while watching the indicator
light on HomeLink. Continue to hold
the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly
or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. Your device
should activate when the HomeLink
button is pressed and released.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly, press
and hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the "press/hold/release" sequence up to
three times to complete the programming
process. If your device still does not
operate, you must program your garage
door. See Programming Your Garage
Door Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
125
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E188212
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and release, every two seconds,
your hand-held transmitter until the
HomeLink indicator light changes to a
rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Release the hand-held transmitter
button.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming, Step 4.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E188213
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the
indicator light above the buttons
flashes rapidly.
2. When the indicator light flashes,
release the buttons. You erased the
codes for all buttons.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.
126
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications to your
device not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. End Users must
follow the specific operating instructions
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)
from the user and must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
The term “IC:” before the
certification/registration number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
127
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING: Do not plug optional
electrical accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter
can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or
serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition
on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the power point and may blow
the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
•Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
•Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
•On the front of the center console.
•Inside the center console.
•On the rear of the center console.
•In the cargo area.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power point, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Doing so may cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 150 watt load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point turns off when you
switch the ignition off, or when the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.
E248640
128
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
•On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
•Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
•Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
•Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
•Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
•Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
•Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
129
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E224821
Front storage compartment with
auxiliary power point and USB
port.
A
Cup holder.B
Storage compartment with
auxiliary power point and USB
port.
C
Auxiliary power point.D
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E131605
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
REAR SEAT ARMREST
E138656
Fold the armrest down to use the armrest
and cupholder.
130
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 mi
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You
can disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped)
E72128
0 (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
II (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
III (start) - cranks the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING (If Equipped)
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular phones
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
131
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Ignition Modes
E142555
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
•Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
when the engine is running but the
vehicle is not moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
•Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once.
Start: Starts the engine.
•Press the brake pedal, and then press
and hold the button until the engine
starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Before starting the engine check the
following:
•Make sure all occupants have fastened
their seatbelts.
•Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
•Make sure the parking brake is on.
•Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to
start your vehicle.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch
until the engine starts.
The system does not function if:
•The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
•The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
the following:
132
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
E241281
1. Place the key in the middle of the tray
as shown.
2. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if it does not detect
a valid passive key.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
push button ignition switch. After 20
seconds, you can no longer start your
vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive
key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close
a door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
You cannot start your vehicle if the system
does not detect a valid passive key within
20 seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start your vehicle after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and do the
following:
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
automatically shuts down your vehicle if
it has been idling for an extended period.
The ignition also turns off to save battery
power. Before your vehicle shuts down, a
message appears in the information
display showing a timer counting down. If
you do not intervene within 30 seconds,
your vehicle shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that your vehicle has shut down
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as normal.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown. When you switch
it off temporarily, it turns on at the next
ignition cycle.
133
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
•Interacting with your vehicle, for
example pressing the brake or
accelerator pedal.
•You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown any time the ignition is on
using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 93).
•Pressing the OK or RESET button to
temporarily switch the feature off for
the current ignition cycle only.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the key to the off position.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING: Switching off the engine
when the vehicle is still moving will result
in a loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P).
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within
two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
134
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
•Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
•Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
property damage or serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
WARNING: Do not fully close the
hood, or allow it to drop under its own
weight when using the engine block heater.
This could damage the power cable and
may cause an electrical short resulting in
fire, injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
•Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
•Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
•Do not use multiple extension cords.
•Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
•Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
•Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
•Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
•Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
•Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
135
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
136
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
AUTO-START-STOP
The system helps reduce fuel consumption
by automatically shutting off and restarting
the engine while your vehicle is stopped.
The engine will restart automatically when
you release the brake pedal. In some
situations, your vehicle may restart
automatically, for example:
•To maintain interior comfort
•To recharge the battery
Note: Power assist steering is turned off
when the engine is off.
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake. Make sure you shift into park
(P) for vehicles with an automatic
transmission. Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
WARNING: Before opening the hood
or performing any maintenance, fully apply
the parking brake, shift into park (P) or
neutral (N) and switch the ignition off.
WARNING: Always switch the
ignition off before leaving the vehicle. If the
ignition is switched on an automatic restart
may occur at any time.
WARNING: The system may require
the engine to automatically restart when
the auto-start-stop indicator illuminates
green or flashes amber. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
The Auto-Start-Stop system status is
available at a glance within the information
display. See Information Displays (page
93).
Enabling Auto-Start-Stop
The system is automatically enabled every
time you start your vehicle if the following
conditions are met:
•The Auto-Start-Stop button is not
pressed (not illuminated).
•Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed
of 3 mph (5 km/h) after the vehicle has
been initially started.
•Your vehicle is stopped.
•Your foot is on the brake pedal.
•The transmission is in drive (D).
•The driver's door is closed.
•There is adequate brake vacuum.
•The interior compartment has been
cooled or warmed to an acceptable
level.
•The front windshield defroster is off.
•The steering wheel is not turned rapidly
or is not at a sharp angle.
•The vehicle is not on a steep road
grade.
•The battery is within optimal operating
conditions (battery state of charge and
temperature in range).
•The engine coolant is at operating
temperature.
•Elevation is below approximately
10,000 ft (3,048 m).
•Ambient temperature is moderate.
The green Auto-Start-Stop
indicator light on the instrument
cluster will illuminate to indicate
when the automatic engine stop occurs.
E146361
If the instrument cluster is
equipped with a grey
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light,
it is illuminated when automatic engine
stop is not available due to one of the
above noted conditions not being met.
137
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
Automatic Engine Restart
Any of the following conditions will result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
•Your foot is removed from the brake
pedal.
•You press the accelerator pedal.
•You press the accelerator and the
brake pedal at the same time.
•The driver seatbelt becomes
unfastened or the driver door is ajar.
•The transmission is moved from drive
(D).
•Your vehicle is moving.
•The interior compartment does not
meet customer comfort when air
conditioning or heat is on.
•Fogging of the windows could occur
and the air conditioning is on.
•The battery is not within optimal
operating conditions.
•The maximum engine off time is
exceeded.
•When you press the Auto-Start-Stop
button while the engine is stopped
automatically.
•The heated windshield is turned on.
Any of the following conditions may result
in an automatic restart of the engine:
•The blower fan speed is increased or
the climate control temperature is
changed.
•An electrical accessory is turned on or
plugged in.
Disabling Auto-Start-Stop
Press the Auto-Start-Stop button located
on the center console to switch the system
off. The button will illuminate. The system
will only be deactivated for the current
ignition cycle. Press the button again to
restore Auto-Start-Stop function.
If your vehicle is in an Auto-Start-Stop
state and you shift the transmission to
reverse while the brake is not depressed,
a message telling you to press the brake
will appear. You must press the brake
pedal within 10 seconds, or a shift to park
and a manual restart will be required.
Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine
message appears and the amber
Auto-Start-Stop indicator light is flashing,
automatic restart is not available. The
vehicle must be restarted manually. See
Information Displays (page 93).
138
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:
•Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
•Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
•Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed
immediately call a physician, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours.
•Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of
fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
permanent injury.
•Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
with water for 15 minutes and seek
medical attention. Failure to seek
proper medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
•Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
thoroughly wash your skin with soap
and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact causes skin irritation.
•Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. Immediately call a
physician if you experience any adverse
reactions.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Vehicles
Flex fuel vehicles have one of the following
identifiers:
•Yellow fuel filler cap.
•Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet.
•Yellow fuel filler housing.
•Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler
door.
139
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E161513
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 or
regular unleaded gasoline blended with a
maximum of 85% ethanol (E85).
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. The use of these fuels
could result in engine damage that will not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 209).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
•Diesel fuel.
•Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
•Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E100 fuel.
•Fuels containing methanol.
•Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
•Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
•Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
Switching Between E85 and
Gasoline
We do not recommend repeatedly
alternating between E85 and gasoline. If
you switch from using E85 to gasoline, or
from gasoline to E85, add as much fuel as
possible, at least half a tank. Drive your
vehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi
(8 km) to allow it to adapt to the change
in ethanol concentration. If you use E85
exclusively, we recommend that you fill
the fuel tank with regular unleaded
gasoline at each scheduled oil change.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is in the spare wheel
storage tray.
140
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
•Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine.
•You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.
Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
more fuel may be required.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
•Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
•Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
•Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
•Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle
of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel filler neck. This may damage
the fuel system filler neck or its seal and
cause fuel to run onto the ground.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or
push open the capless fuel system with
foreign objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel
in the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized waste
disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 140).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they may not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.
141
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
Refueling System Overview
E267248
B
C
A
Fuel filler door.A
Fuel tank filler valve.B
Fuel tank filler pipe.C
Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler
cap.
142
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E206911
A B
C D
Left-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
A
Right-hand side. To open the
fuel filler door, press the center
rear edge of the fuel filler door
and then release.
B
Left-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.
C
Right-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.
D
Refueling Your Vehicle
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel
tank filler valve. This could damage the
fuel system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted position
when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when the
fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off
for the first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
into the fuel tank.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.
143
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E139202
A
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep the
fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel
tank filler pipe.
E139203
A
B
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
B when refueling. Holding the fuel
pump nozzle in position A can affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
E206912
A B
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.
E119081
6. When you finish refueling slightly raise
the fuel pump nozzle and slowly
remove it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Do not attempt to start the engine if you
have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel.
Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your
vehicle immediately checked.
Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully
close, a message could appear in the
information display.
Message
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
If the message appears, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
144
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that may be restricting its
movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the
fuel filler funnel provided with your
vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See
Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page
140). This action should dislodge any
debris that may be preventing the fuel
tank filler valve from fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel
filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately
reset. If the message continues to appear
and a warning lamp illuminates, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 316).
In addition, the fuel tank contains an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
Filling the Fuel Tank
For consistent results when refueling:
•Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
•Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
•Allow no more than one automatic
shut-off when refueling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy
figures through the trip computer average
fuel function. See Information Displays
(page 93).
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is
the break-in period of the engine. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
1. Completely fill the fuel tank and record
the initial odometer reading. See
Refueling (page 142).
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record
the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per
gallon) fuel consumption, divide miles
traveled by gallons used.
145
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving, for example city
or highway. This provides an accurate
estimate of your vehicle’s fuel economy
under current driving conditions. Keeping
records during summer and winter shows
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
Conditions
•Heavily loading your vehicle reduces
fuel economy.
•Carrying unnecessary weight in your
vehicle may reduce fuel economy.
•Avoid adding accessories that increase
aerodynamic drag to your vehicle such
as bug deflectors, car top carriers and
ski or bike racks.
•Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
•Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
•Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
•You will get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
146
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
EMISSION LAW
WARNING: Do not remove or alter
the original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the vehicle
from the engine and exhaust system heat
and noise. On vehicles with no original
equipment floor covering insulation, do not
carry passengers in a manner that permits
prolonged skin contact with the metal
floor. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in fire or personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any
vehicle modification without first
determining applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions
control systems including
related sensors or the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced
engine power and the illumination of the
service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
•Removal or rendering inoperative by
any person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
•Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use.
•The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
•Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
•Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
•A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
•A plugged engine air filter element.
•Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
•A clogged fuel filter.
•Contaminated fuel.
•Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
•An open or pinched sensor hose.
•Incorrect engine oil level.
147
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
•Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
•Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The preceding statements
concerning prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance, and the noise warranty
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is very
high. Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short period
of engine operation and stays hot after the
engine is switched off.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
•Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
•Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
•Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 221).
•Use only the specified fuel listed.
•Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
•Avoid running out of fuel.
•Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
148
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 142).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
149
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.
150
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Engine Emission Control
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift into
park (P). Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not apply the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal
simultaneously. Applying both pedals
simultaneously for more than a few
seconds will limit engine performance,
which may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury.
WARNING: When your vehicle is
stationary, keep the brake pedal fully
pressed when shifting gears. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury, death or property damage.
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
Understanding the Positions of
Your Automatic Transmission
E142629
Park.R
Reverse.R
Neutral.N
Drive.D
Sport.S
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
Press the button on the front of the
transmission selector to shift to each
position. The instrument cluster displays
the current gear.
1. Fully press down on the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
3. When you are finished driving, come to
a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down when in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
151
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Transmission
Sport (S)
Switch on sport mode by shifting the
gearshift lever to sport (S). In sport mode
the transmission selects the optimum gear
for best performance. This gear selection
is typically lower than that of drive (D) and
the shifts are faster.
Moving the gearshift lever to sport (S):
•Provides additional slope, engine
braking and extends lower gear
operation to enhance performance for
uphill climbs, hilly terrain or
mountainous areas. This can increase
engine RPM during engine braking.
•Provides additional lower gear
operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy.
•Gears are selected more quickly and
at higher engine speeds.
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic transmission gearshift lever.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears up or
down.
In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift still makes some
downshifts if it has determined that you
have not downshifted in time. Although
SelectShift makes some downshifts for
you, it still allows you to downshift at any
time as long as the SelectShift determines
that damage to the engine from
over-revving does not occur.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
If the engine is approaching the RPM limit,
SelectShift upshifts for you.
If the vehicle has a toggle on the
gearshift lever, press the + toggle
switch on the side of the transmission
selector to activate SelectShift.
•Press the (+) button to upshift.
•Press the (-) button to downshift.
E142629
If the vehicle has steering wheel
paddles, pull the + paddle on the
steering wheel to activate SelectShift.
•Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
•Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.
E144821
SelectShift in drive (D):
•Provides a temporary manual mode
for performing more demanding
maneuvers where extra control of gear
selection is required, for example, when
towing or overtaking. This mode can
hold a selected gear for a temporary
period of time dependent on driver
inputs, for example, steering or
accelerator pedal input.
152
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Transmission
SelectShift in sport (S):
•Provides a permanent manual gear
selection where full control of gear
selection is required.
To exit SelectShift mode, shift the
transmission into drive (D).
The instrument cluster displays your
currently selected gear. If a gear is
requested but not available due to vehicle
conditions, low speed, too high engine
speed for requested gear selection, the
current gear flashes three times.
Note: At full accelerator pedal travel, the
transmission downshifts to ensure
maximum performance.
Note: In low traction conditions, you can
pull away in second gear using SelectShift.
To perform this operation select drive (D)
or sport (S) mode and press either the +
toggle or pull the + paddle until 2 is
displayed on the cluster. Your vehicle is now
ready to move in 2nd gear.
Brake-Shift Interlock Override
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle
until you verify that the stoplamps are
working.
WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which means
your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid
unwanted vehicle movement, always fully
apply the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheels chocks if
appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not
be working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Use the brake shift interlock lever to move
the gearshift lever from the park position
in the event of an electrical malfunction or
if your vehicle has a dead battery.
Apply the parking brake and turn your
vehicle off before performing this
procedure.
E223576
1. Remove the shifter boot using a
suitable tool
E223577
2. Using a screwdriver or similar tool,
depress the brake shift interlock
override until the blocker moves.
153
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Transmission
3. Move the transmission selector from
park (P) to neutral (N).
4. Install the shifter boot.
5. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle
and release the parking brake.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
154
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Transmission
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
This system is a proactive system. It has
the ability to anticipate wheel slip and
transfer torque to the rear wheels before
slip occurs. Even when wheel slip is not
present, the system is continuously making
adjustments to the torque distribution, in
an attempt to improve straight line and
cornering behavior, both on and off road.
The system automatically turns on every
time you switch the ignition on.
All components of the system are sealed
and do not require maintenance.
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
Note: When a system malfunction is
present, a warning message will be
displayed in the information display. See
General Information (page 93). This
means the system is not functioning
correctly and has defaulted to front-wheel
drive only. Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer.
Note: A message will be displayed in the
information display when the system
overheats and switches to front-wheel drive.
This condition may occur if you operate your
vehicle in extreme high load conditions or
with excessive wheel slip, (i.e. deep sand).
To resume four-wheel drive function as soon
as possible, stop your vehicle in a safe
location and switch the ignition off. After
the system cools and normal four-wheel
drive functionality resumes, a message will
be displayed for approximately five seconds.
Note: If a warning message appears in the
information display when using the spare
tire, it should turn off after reinstalling the
repaired or replaced road tire and you switch
the ignition on.
Note: It is recommended that you reinstall
the repaired tire or replace the tire as soon
as possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes
between the front and rear axles could
cause system damage or default the system
to front-wheel drive.
The system gives your vehicle some limited
off-road capabilities. Operating your
vehicle in conditions other than moderate
sand, snow, mud or rough roads could
subject it to excessive stress and heat
which could result in system damage. This
will not be covered by your vehicle
warranty.
E142669
A graphic will be displayed in the
information display to advise you of the
power distribution between the front and
rear wheels. The more the area is filled the
more power is being distributed to that
wheel.
Driving in Special Conditions With
Four-Wheel Drive
Four-wheel drive vehicles are suitable for
driving on sand, snow, mud and rough
roads and have operating characteristics
that are somewhat different from
conventional vehicles, both on and off the
freeway.
Note: It may be useful to switch Traction
control off. This allows for more wheel spin
and engine torque in certain off road
conditions or if your vehicle becomes stuck.
155
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
When driving at slow speeds off road under
high load conditions, use a low gear when
possible. Low gear operation will maximize
the engine and transmission cooling
capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the air
conditioning may cycle on and off to
prevent the engine from overheating.
Basic Operating Principles
•Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
•When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water,
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed has been reduced
ease your vehicle back onto the road. Do
not turn the steering wheel sharply while
returning your vehicle to the road.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of
the road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You may lose control
if you do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the road which
could cause your vehicle to slide sideways
out of control or roll over. Remember, your
safety and the safety of others should be
your primary concern.
Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving your
vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering can result
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal when changes in vehicle speed are
required. Avoid abrupt steering,
acceleration and braking. This could result
in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss
of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
all available road surface to bring your
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
If your vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e. from concrete to
gravel) there will be a change in the way
your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.
steering, acceleration or braking).
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid excessive wheel slip.
Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for
an extended period of time. This will cause
the system to overheat. A message will be
displayed in the information display. See
General Information (page 93).
To resume operation, switch the ignition
off and allow the system to cool down for
a minimum of 15 minutes. After the system
has cooled down, a message will be
displayed briefly in the information display.
See General Information (page 93).
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Low gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
156
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
causes vehicle momentum to work against
you and your vehicle could become stuck
to the point that assistance may be
required from another vehicle. Remember,
you may be able to back out the way you
came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
Mud
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can
lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of your vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the wheel rims. If the ignition
system gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by applying light pressure to the
brake pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission. If the front or rear
axle is submerged in water, the axle
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
should be checked and changed if
necessary.
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
around because this could cause vehicle
roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
E143949
157
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
overdrive or move the transmission
selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
braking as you could lose control. The front
wheels have to be turning in order to steer
your vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
brake pedal.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING: If you are driving in
slippery conditions that require tire chains
or cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of your vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking. Although a
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in
snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not
become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. As your vehicle has a four
wheel anti-lock brake system, do not pump
the brake pedal. See Hints on Driving
With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 160).
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute, damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizer
bars) or by using replacement parts not
equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
158
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle
to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when your
vehicle is subject to off road usage.
159
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out and an
authorized dealer should check them. If the
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder
in the steering wheel while braking, an
authorized dealer should check your vehicle.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels
(page 273).
E138644
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 89).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Switch the engine off, move the
transmission to park (P) and apply the
parking brake. Inspect the accelerator
pedal and the area around it for any items
or debris that may be obstructing its
movement.If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Emergency Brake Assist
Emergency brake assist detects when you
brake heavily by measuring the rate at
which you press the brake pedal. It
provides maximum braking efficiency as
long as you press the pedal. Emergency
brake assist can reduce stopping distances
in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you switch the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the anti-lock braking system may
be disabled. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.
E138644
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates with the parking
brake released, have your brake
system serviced immediately.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risks when:
•You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
•Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
160
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Brakes
•You take corners too fast.
•The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift into
park (P). Switch the ignition off and
remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
To apply the parking brake:
1. Firmly press the brake pedal.
2. Pull the parking brake lever upward to
its fullest extent.
Note: Do not press the release button when
pulling the parking brake lever upward.
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
facing uphill, shift into park (P) and turn the
steering wheel away from the curb.
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
facing downhill, shift into park (P) and turn
the steering wheel toward the curb.
To release the parking brake:
1. Firmly press the brake pedal.
2. Slightly pull the parking brake lever
upward.
3. Press the release button and push the
parking brake lever downward.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
The electric parking brake replaces the
conventional handbrake. The operating
switch is on the center console.
WARNING: Always set the parking
brake and leave your vehicle with the
transmission in park (P).
Note: When you apply the electric parking
brake in certain conditions, for example, on
a steep hill, the electric parking brake may
reapply the brakes within three to ten
minutes.
Note: You may notice various noises when
you apply and release the electric parking
brake. This is normal and no cause for
concern.
Applying the Electric Parking
brake
WARNING: The brake system
warning lamp will flash when applying the
electric parking brake. If the brake system
warning lamp continues to flash there
could be a problem with your electric
parking brake. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
WARNING: Applying the electric
parking brake while moving will result in
the engagement of the anti-lock braking
system. Do not use the electric parking
brake system when the vehicle is moving
unless the normal brake system is unable
to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: With the exception of
emergency conditions (for example, the
brake pedal is broken or is blocked), do not
apply the electric parking brake while the
vehicle is moving. On bends, or poor road
surfaces or weather conditions, emergency
braking can cause the vehicle to skid out
of control or off the road.
161
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Brakes
Note: The brake system warning lamp
illuminates for ten seconds if you switch the
ignition off after you apply the electric
parking brake, or you apply the electric
parking brake after you switch the ignition
off.
Note: The electric parking brake will not
automatically apply. You must apply the
electric parking brake using the electric
parking brake switch.
E227395
Pull the switch up to apply the electric
parking brake.
The brake system warning lamp flashes
for about two seconds and then
illuminates to confirm that you have
applied the electric parking brake. See
Information Displays (page 93).
If you apply the electric parking brake when
your vehicle is moving, the brake system
warning lamp illuminates and a warning
tone sounds. See Information Displays
(page 93).
If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph
(6 km/h), the braking force is applied as
long as you pull the switch. Releasing or
pressing the switch or pressing the
accelerator pedal stops the braking force.
Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake
You can release the electric parking brake
either manually by pressing the switch or
automatically.
Manual release
WARNING: If the brake system
warning light remains illuminated or
flashes for more than four seconds after
you have released the parking brake, there
could be a problem with your braking
system. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
E227515
You can manually release the electric
parking brake by:
1. Switching the ignition on.
2. Pressing the brake pedal.
3. Pressing the electric parking brake
switch.
When the electric parking brake is released,
the brake system warning lamp turns off.
162
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Brakes
Automatic release - drive away release
Your vehicle automatically releases the
parking brake if all of the following
conditions exist:
•The driver door is closed.
•The accelerator pedal is pressed.
•The transmission is in drive (D), reverse
(R) or sport mode (S).
•There are no faults detected in the
parking brake system.
Note: If the electric parking brake warning
lamp stays illuminated, the electric parking
brake will not automatically release. You
must release the electric parking brake using
the electric parking brake switch.
The brake system warning lamp goes off
to confirm that you have released the
electric parking brake.
Note: The electric parking brake drive away
release makes starting on a hill easier. This
feature releases the parking brake
automatically when the vehicle has
sufficient drive force to move up the hill. To
assure drive away release when starting
uphill, press the accelerator pedal quickly.
Driving with a Trailer
Depending on the slope and the weight of
the trailer, your vehicle and trailer may roll
backwards slightly when you start on a
slope.
To prevent this from happening, do the
following:
1. Pull the switch up and hold it in this
position.
2. Drive your vehicle, then release the
switch when you notice that the engine
has developed sufficient driving force.
Battery With No Charge
WARNING: You will not be able to
apply or release the electric parking brake
if the battery is low or has no charge.
If the battery is low or has no charge, use
jumper cables and a booster battery.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you leave
your vehicle, always apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into park
(P) for automatic transmission or first gear
for manual transmission.
WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Note: If the engine is revved excessively, or
if a malfunction is detected, the system will
be deactivated.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle will
remain stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows you time to move your
foot from the brake to the accelerator
pedal. The brakes release automatically
163
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Brakes
when the engine has sufficient torque to
prevent your vehicle from rolling down the
grade. This is an advantage when pulling
away on a slope, for example from a car
park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing
uphill into a parking space.
The system will activate automatically on
any slope that will cause significant vehicle
rollback. For vehicles with a manual
transmission, you can switch this feature
off using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 93). The
system will remain on or off depending on
how it was last set.
Note: There is no warning lamp to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Auto
Hold, Hill Start Assist will not be available
while Auto Hold is active.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Bring your vehicle to a complete
standstill. Keep the brake pedal
pressed and select an uphill gear (for
example, drive (D) or first (1) when
facing uphill or reverse (R) when facing
downhill).
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system will activate
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle will remain
on the slope without rolling away for
about two or three seconds. This hold
time will automatically be extended if
you are in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
brakes will release automatically.
Switching the System On and Off
You can switch this feature on or off if your
vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission and an information display.
See General Information (page 93). The
system remembers the last setting when
you start your vehicle.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a
manual transmission and an information
display, you cannot turn the system on or
off. When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
164
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING: The stability and traction
control light illuminates steadily if the
system detects a failure. Make sure you
did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either
using the information display controls or
the switch.
Using the Information Display
Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General
Information (page 93).
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
Use the traction control switch on the
instrument panel to switch the system off
or on.
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light:
•Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
•Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
•Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
E130458
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
on engine start-up and stays on
when you switch the traction control
system off.
165
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications
involving braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of your
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even
advanced technology cannot defy the laws
of physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your electronic
stability control system activates, SLOW
DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If a fault occurs in either the stability
control or the traction control system, you
may experience the following conditions:
•The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
•The stability control and traction
control systems do not enhance your
vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
the wheels.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
•The stability and traction control light
flashes.
•Your vehicle slows down.
•Reduced engine power.
•A vibration in the brake pedal.
•The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
•If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the system applies
higher brake force.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
it changes by applying the brakes to one
or more wheels individually.
166
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Stability Control
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 165).
E72903
AA
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
You cannot switch the stability control and
roll stability control systems off, but when
you shift into reverse (R), the systems
deactivate.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Traction Control
(page 165).
167
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in reverse
(R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
inclement weather, air brakes, external
motors and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This may
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
MyKey™, the sensing system cannot be
turned off when a MyKey™ is present. See
Principle of Operation (page 53).
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alerts.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false alerts. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system. Remove the add-on device
to prevent false alerts.
Note: When a trailer is connected to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide an alert. Disable
the rear parking aid when a trailer is
connected to prevent the alert.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
The system can be switched off through
the information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
General Information (page 93).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display. See Information Messages
(page 96).
REAR PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 12 in
(30 cm) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.
168
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R) :
•Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
•Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
•Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away
from the bumper.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The distance indicator displays when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
The indicator displays:
•As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
•If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed
out.
FRONT PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P) and your vehicle is traveling at low
speed.
E187330
Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
the front bumper. The coverage area
decreases at the outer corners.
When your vehicle approaches an object,
a warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the warning
tone repeat rate increases. The warning
tone sounds continuously when an object
is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the front
bumper.
169
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
You can switch the system off through the
information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
General Information (page 93). If your
vehicle has a parking aid button, you can
switch the system off by pressing the
button.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The indicator displays:
•As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
•If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed
out.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the
front sensing system provides audio
warnings when your vehicle is moving and
the detected obstacle is moving towards
your vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary,
the audio warning will be stopped after 2
seconds. Visual indication is always
present in reverse (R).
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any
other forward gear (for example, low (L),
sport (S) or any forward gear in a manual
transmission), the front sensing system
provides audio and visual warnings when
your vehicle is moving below a speed of
5 mph (8 km/h) and an obstacle is located
inside the detection area. Once the vehicle
is stationary, the audio warning will be
stopped after 2 seconds and the visual
indication stops after 4 seconds. If the
obstacles detected are within 12 in
(30 cm), the visual indication remains on.
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the
system provides visual indication only
when your vehicle is moving at 5 mph
(8 km/h) or below and an obstacle is
located inside the detection area. Once
your vehicle is stationary, the visual
indication will stop after 4 seconds.
SIDE SENSING SYSTEM (If
Equipped)
The side sensing system uses the front and
rear side sensors to detect and map
obstacles within the vehicle's driving path,
located near the sides of your vehicle. The
side sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P).
Note: Obstacles that enter the side
detection area without being detected and
mapped by the front or rear side sensors will
not be detected.
E187810
Coverage area is up to 24 in (60 cm) from
the sides of your vehicle.
When the system detects an object close
to the side of your vehicle, an audible
warning sounds. As your vehicle moves
closer to obstacles within the driving path
of your vehicle, the rate of the audible
warning increases.
170
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)
E190459
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
As the distance to the obstacle decreases,
the indicator blocks illuminate and move
toward the vehicle icon. If there is no
obstacle detected, the distance indicator
blocks show greyed out.
When you shift to reverse (R), the side
sensing system provides audible warnings
when your vehicle is moving and obstacles
are detected within 24 in (60 cm) and are
inside the driving path of your vehicle.
When you stop your vehicle the audible
warning stops after two seconds.
Note: Visual distance indication remains
on when the transmission is in reverse (R).
When you shift to drive (D) or any other
forward gear, for example, low (L), sport
(S) or any forward gear in manual
transmission, the side sensing system
provides audible and visual distance
warnings when your vehicle is moving
below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and
obstacles are detected within 24 in
(60 cm) and are inside the driving path of
your vehicle. Once your vehicle reaches a
standstill condition, the audible warning
stops after two seconds and visual
indication stops after four seconds.
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the side
sensing system provides visual distance
indication only when your vehicle is moving
below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and
there is a front or rear parking aid obstacle
detected, and the side obstacle is within
24 in (60 cm) from the side of your vehicle.
When you stop your vehicle the visual
distance indication stops after four
seconds.
If the side sensing system is not available,
the side distance indicator blocks do not
appear.
The side sensing system is not available
under the following condition:
•If you switch the traction control
system off.
The side sensing system may not be
available until you have driven
approximately the length of your vehicle
in order for the system to reinitialize if:
•You switch the ignition on, off and back
on.
•Your vehicle remains stationary for over
two minutes.
•The anti-lock brake system is
activated.
•The traction control system is
activated.
•When the steering wheel angle
information is not available, the side
sensing system is not available. The
vehicle must be driven at least 492 ft
(150 m) above 19 mph (30 km/h) to
recover the steering wheel angle
information.
171
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The sensors may not
detect objects in heavy rain or other
conditions that cause interference.
WARNING: Active park assist does
not apply the brakes under any
circumstances.
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
Active park assist is a multi-step process
and may require you to shift the
transmission multiple times. Follow the
onscreen instructions until the parking
maneuver is complete.
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose
to override the system by grabbing the
steering wheel, or by taking full control of
your vehicle after pressing the active park
assist button.
Keep your hands, hair, clothing and any
loose items clear of the steering wheel
when using active park assist.
The sensors are on the front and rear
bumpers.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.
The sensors may falsely detect objects due
to ultrasonic interference caused by
motorcycle exhausts, truck air brakes or
horns, for example.
Note: If you change any tires, the system
must recalibrate and may not correctly
operate for a short time.
The system may not correctly operate in
any of the following conditions:
•You use a spare tire or a tire that is
significantly worn more than the other
tires.
•One or more tires are incorrectly
inflated.
•You try to park on a tight curve.
•Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space. For
example, a pedestrian or cyclist.
•The edge of the neighboring parked
vehicle is high off the ground. For
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck.
•The weather conditions are poor. For
example, during heavy rain, snow, fog,
high humidity and high temperatures.
Do not use the system if:
•You have attached an add-on
accessory close to the sensors on the
front or rear of your vehicle. For
example, a bike rack or trailer.
•You have attached an overhanging
object to the roof. For example, a
surfboard.
172
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
•The front bumper, rear bumper or the
side sensors are damaged.
•The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle. For example, a mini-spare tire.
Using Active Park Assist
Selecting an Active Park Assist Mode
E146186
Press the button once to
activate parallel parking. Press
the button a second time to
activate perpendicular parking. If you press
the button again the system switches off.
If your vehicle is parked and after you
switch the ignition on, you can use the
information display to toggle through the
modes. Press the button to switch the
system on and open the system menu in
the information display.
Note: If your vehicle is parked, the default
mode is parallel park out assist. However,
if you did not use active park assist to
parallel park your vehicle, use the
information display to select park out assist.
Note: You can repeatedly press the active
park assist button to toggle through the
modes only after moving your vehicle
approximately 33 ft (10 m).
To toggle through the modes, use the
buttons on the information display to
select the following:
•Parallel parking.
•Perpendicular parking.
•Parallel park out assist.
•Switch the system off.
Note: There is no time limit for toggling
through the modes.
Parallel Parking
The system detects available parallel
parking spaces and steers your vehicle into
the space. You control the accelerator,
gearshift and brakes. The system visually
and audibly guides you into a parallel
parking space.
E146186
Press the button once to search
for a parking space.
Note: You can also switch the system on
after you have already driven partially or
completely past a parking space. Press the
active park assist button and the system
informs you if you have recently passed a
suitable parking space.
When the vehicle speed is less than
22 mph (35 km/h), the system scans both
sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. A message and a graphic
appear in the information display to
indicate the system is searching for a
parking space. Use the direction indicator
lever to search for a parking space on the
driver or passenger side of your vehicle.
Note: The system scans both sides of your
vehicle and offers parking spaces one side
at a time if you do not use the direction
indicator.
Note: The system defaults to the passenger
side if you do not use the direction indicator.
E130107
Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m)
and parallel to the other parked vehicles
when searching for a parking space.
Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft
(0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) away
from other parked vehicles, the system may
not be able to detect an available parking
space.
173
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
When the system detects a suitable space,
a message displays and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the onscreen
instructions. If your vehicle is moving very
slowly, you may have to move forward a
short distance before the system is ready
to park.
Note: You must observe that the space the
system selects remains clear of obstructions
at all times during the maneuver.
Note: The system always offers the last
parking space it detects. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces when you
are driving, it offers the last one.
Note: If the vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the
system shows a message to instruct you to
reduce the vehicle speed.
Automatically Steering into a Parallel
Parking Space
When you shift into reverse (R), with your
hands off the steering wheel and nothing
obstructing its movement, your vehicle
steers itself into the space. The system
displays instructions to move your vehicle
backward and forward in the space.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you
interrupt the maneuver, or the system
switches off, you must take full control of
your vehicle.
Note: If the system detects an object is very
close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe
to continue the maneuver, it may instruct
you to stop your vehicle. The system may
not provide any further instruction. Steering
assistance continues to operate but you
must decide if it is safe to continue the
maneuver.
E130108
When you believe your vehicle is correctly
parked, or a solid tone sounds and an
information message appears, bring your
vehicle to a complete stop.
When the Active Park Assist maneuver is
complete, a tone sounds and an
information message appears.
Note: You are responsible for checking how
your vehicle is parked and making any
necessary corrections before leaving your
vehicle.
Deactivating Active Park Assist
You can manually deactivate the system
by:
•Pressing the Active Park Assist button
during an active maneuver.
•Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
•Driving above 22 mph (35 km/h) for 30
seconds when searching for a parking
space.
•Driving above 31 mph (50 km/h).
•Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
an active maneuver.
•Switching the traction control system
off.
Certain vehicle conditions may also
deactivate the system, for example:
•The traction control system activates
or fails.
•The anti-lock brake system activates
or fails.
If the system malfunctions, a message
appears and a tone sounds. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
174
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
Perpendicular Parking
The system detects available
perpendicular parking spaces and steers
your vehicle into the space. You control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you into
a perpendicular parking space.
E146186
Press the button twice to search
for a parking space.
When the vehicle speed is less than 19 mph
(30 km/h), the system scans both sides of
your vehicle for an available parking space.
A message and a graphic appear in the
information display to indicate the system
is searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator lever to search for a
parking space on the driver or passenger
side of your vehicle.
Note: The system scans both sides of your
vehicle and offers parking spaces one side
at a time if you do not use the direction
indicator.
Note: The system defaults to the passenger
side if you do not use the direction indicator.
E186193
Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m)
and perpendicular to the other parked
vehicles when searching for a parking
space.
Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft
(0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) away
from other parked vehicles, the system may
not be able to detect an available parking
space.
When the system detects a suitable space,
a message displays and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the onscreen
instructions. If your vehicle is moving very
slowly, you may have to move forward a
short distance before the system is ready
to park.
Note: You must observe that the space the
system selects remains clear of obstructions
at all times during the maneuver.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces when you
are driving, it offers the last one.
Note: If the vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 19 mph (30 km/h), the
system shows a message to instruct you to
reduce the vehicle speed.
Automatically Steering into a
Perpendicular Parking Space
When you shift into reverse (R), with your
hands off the steering wheel and nothing
obstructing its movement, your vehicle
steers itself into the space. The system
displays instructions to move your vehicle
backward and forward in the space.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you
interrupt the maneuver, or the system
switches off, you must take full control of
your vehicle.
Note: If the system detects an object is very
close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe
to continue the maneuver, it may instruct
you to stop your vehicle. The system may
not provide any further instruction. Steering
assistance continues to operate but you
must decide if it is safe to continue the
maneuver.
175
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
E186191
When you believe your vehicle is correctly
parked, or a solid tone sounds and an
information message appears, bring your
vehicle to a complete stop.
When the active park assist maneuver is
complete, a tone sounds and a message
appears.
Note: You are responsible for checking how
your vehicle is parked and making any
necessary corrections before leaving your
vehicle.
Deactivating Active Park Assist
You can manually deactivate the system
by:
•Pressing the Active Park Assist button
during an active maneuver.
•Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
•Driving above 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30
seconds when searching for a parking
space.
•Driving above 31 mph (50 km/h).
•Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
an active maneuver.
•Switching the traction control system
off.
Certain vehicle conditions may also
deactivate the system, for example:
•The traction control system activates
or fails.
•The anti-lock brake system activates
or fails.
If the system malfunctions, a message
appears and a tone sounds. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Parallel Park Out Assist
The system steers your vehicle out of a
parallel parking space. You control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you out
of a parallel parking space.
Note: This system is not intended to assist
when exiting a perpendicular parking space.
E146186
Press the button once when your
vehicle is stationary in a parallel
parking space.
Note: If you did not use active park assist
to parallel park your vehicle, pressing the
button once selects parallel park. You must
use the information display to select park
out assist.
The system displays a message instructing
you to switch a direction indicator on. Use
the direction indicator to select which side
of your vehicle you want to exit the parking
space. The system displays instructions to
move your vehicle backward and forward
in the space.
Note: If the system detects an object is very
close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe
to continue the maneuver, it may instruct
you to stop your vehicle. The system may
not provide any further instruction. Steering
assistance continues to operate but you
must decide if it is safe to continue the
maneuver.
176
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
E188012
After the system directs your vehicle to a
position where you can exit the parking
space in a forward movement, a message
appears instructing you to take full control
of your vehicle. Generally, hand-over is
when your vehicle is still inside the parking
space.
Note: Parallel Park Out Assist may not be
available when the clearance to the front
or the rear of your vehicle is too small.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you
interrupt the maneuver, or the system
switches off, you must take full control of
your vehicle.
Note: You are responsible for controlling
your vehicle and making sure the path is
clear prior to pulling into traffic.
Troubleshooting
Possible CauseSymptom
You may have switched the traction control off.The system does not search for
a parking space. The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must
be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.
The sensors may be blocked. For example, snow, ice
or dirt buildup. Blocked sensors can affect how the
system functions.
The system does not offer a
parking space.
There is not enough room in the parking space for your
vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on
the opposite side of the parking space.
The parking space is more than 5 ft (1.5 m) or less than
2 ft (0.5 m) away.
The vehicle speed is greater than 22 mph (35 km/h)
for parallel parking or greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)
for perpendicular parking.
You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After
you reconnect the battery you must drive your vehicle
on a straight road for a short period of time.
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the
current transmission position. For example, rolling
forward when in reverse (R).
The system does not correctly
position your vehicle in a
parking space.
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the
system from correctly aligning your vehicle.
177
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
Possible CauseSymptom
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be
correctly parked.
Your vehicle stopped too far past the parking space.
The tires may not be correctly installed or maintained.
For example, not inflated correctly, improper size, or of
different sizes.
A repair or alteration changes the detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example,
a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects
changes after your vehicle passes the space.
The temperature around your vehicle quickly changes.
For example, driving from a heated garage into the cold,
or after leaving a car wash.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNING: The rear view camera
system is a reverse aid supplement device
that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera
system.
WARNING: Back up as slow as
possible since higher speeds might limit
your reaction time to stop your vehicle.
WARNING: Use caution when using
the rear video camera and the luggage
compartment door is ajar. If the luggage
compartment door is ajar, the camera will
be out of position and the video image may
be incorrect. All guidelines disappear when
the luggage compartment door is ajar.
WARNING: Use caution when
turning camera features on or off. Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
178
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
•Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
•Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
•Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the luggage compartment door or
liftgate is open, no rear view camera
features will display.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
•Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
•Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
•The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Upon a battery disconnect, the active
guidelines may not be functional until your
vehicle has been driven a short distance and
exceeds a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
179
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If you change the
steering wheel position while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle.
Manual Zoom
WARNING: When manual zoom is
on, the full area behind your vehicle may
not show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Camera System Settings
The rear view camera system settings can
be accessed through the display screen.
See General Information (page 93).
180
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
Obstacle Distance Indicator
E190459
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when any of the sensing systems
detect an object.
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The default setting for the rear camera
delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P) while the Delay Mode is ON, the
camera image remains in the display until:
•Your vehicle speed sufficiently
increases.
•You shift your vehicle into park (P) on
vehicles with automatic transmission.
•You enable the hand brake on vehicles
with manual transmission.
181
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNING: Do not use cruise control
on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when
the road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
WARNING: When you are going
downhill, your vehicle speed could increase
above the set speed. The system does not
apply the brakes.
Note: Cruise control disengages if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed when driving
uphill.
E144500
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press ON.
E71340
The indicator displays in the
instrument cluster.
Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press SET+ or SET-.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color.
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
•Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
speed in small increments.
•Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
SET+ or SET-.
•Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CAN or tap the brake pedal. The set
speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Press OFF when the system is in standby
mode, or switch the ignition off.
182
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Cruise Control
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNING: Always pay close
attention to changing road conditions
when using adaptive cruise control. The
system does not replace attentive driving.
Failing to pay attention to the road may
result in a crash, serious injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the adaptive
cruise control when entering or leaving a
highway, on roads with intersections or
roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or
roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved,
or steep slopes.
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer with aftermarket
trailer brake controls. Aftermarket trailer
brakes will not function properly when you
switch the system on because the brakes
are electronically controlled. Failing to do
so may result in loss of vehicle control,
which could result in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes
other than those recommended because
this can affect the normal operation of the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
may not detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
does not detect pedestrians or objects in
the road.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
does not detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
is not a crash warning or avoidance system.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
You can select four gap settings.
The system uses a radar sensor that
projects a beam directly in front of your
vehicle.
E223551
The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
Press the cruise control button.
E144529
The indicator, current gap setting
and set speed appear in the
information display.
183
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Cruise Control
E247590
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press SET-.
3. A green indicator light, the current gap
setting and your set speed appear in
the information display.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
5. A vehicle image illuminates if the
system detects a vehicle in front of you.
Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a
vehicle, your vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does your
vehicle always decelerate quickly enough
to avoid a crash without driver intervention.
Always apply the brakes when necessary.
Failing to do so may result in a crash,
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
only warns of vehicles detected by the
radar sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
•The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
•The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
•The vehicle speed falls below 10 mph
(20 km/h).
•You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds when the system
continues to brake. A red warning bar
displays on the windshield and you must
take immediate action.
Setting the Gap Distance
Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front by pressing the gap control.
184
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Cruise Control
E224044
Gap decrease.A
Gap increase.B
E247590
The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by
the bars in the image.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Dynamic behaviorGraphic display,
bars indicated
between vehicles
Sport.1
Normal.2
Normal.3
Comfort.4
Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
Overriding the Set Speed
WARNING: If you override the
system by pressing the accelerator pedal,
it does not automatically apply the brakes
to maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
E144529
When you override the system,
the green indicator light
illuminates and the vehicle
image does not appear in the information
display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
•Press RES+ or SET- to change the set
speed in small increments.
•Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
RES+ or SET-.
•Press and hold RES+ or SET- to
change the set speed in large
increments. Release the control when
you reach the desired speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CAN or tap the brake pedal. The set
speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Press RES+. Your vehicle speed returns to
the previously set speed and gap setting.
The set speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
185
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Cruise Control
Automatic Cancellation
Note: If the engine speed drops too low, an
audible warning sounds and a message
appears in the information display.
Automatic braking releases.
The system does not operate below
12 mph (20 km/h).
Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
•The tires lose traction.
•The engine speed is too low.
•You apply the parking brake.
Hilly Condition Usage
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
Select a lower gear when the system is
active in situations such as prolonged
downhill driving on steep grades, for
example in mountainous areas. The
system needs additional engine braking in
these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
it from overheating.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
Note: You erase the set speed and gap
setting when you switch the system off.
Press the cruise control button when the
system is in standby mode, or switch the
ignition off.
Detection Issues
WARNING: On rare occasions,
detection issues can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
WARNING: If the system
malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
a vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does
not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
186
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Cruise Control
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases, the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
take action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection.
System Not Available
The system may not turn on if there is:
•A blocked sensor.
•High brake temperature.
•A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E145632
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
behind a fascia panel.
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is in the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does
not function when something blocks the
sensor.
187
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Cruise Control
Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar is dirty or
obstructed.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
The surface of the radar is clean but the
message remains in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Water, snow or ice on the surface of the
road may interfere with the radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.
You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your
vehicle.
Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING: Normal cruise control
will not brake when your vehicle is
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
You can change from adaptive cruise
control to normal cruise control through
the information display.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, and the system
does not respond to lead vehicles.
Automatic braking remains active to
maintain set speed.
188
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Cruise Control
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest breaks
if you feel tired. Do not wait for the system
to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles
may result in the system warning you even
if you are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road
lane markings.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.
Note: The system may not operate correctly
if you modify the ride height.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects, snow or ice.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
activates at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h). When below the activation
speed, the information display informs the
driver that the system is unavailable.
E249505
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system alerts you using a
chime and a message in the information
display.
USING DRIVER ALERT
Switching the System On and Off
Switch the system on or off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 93).
When active, the system monitors your
alertness level based upon your driving
behavior in relation to the lane markings
and other factors.
189
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
System Warnings
Note: The system does not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system has two stages. First,
the system issues a temporary warning
that you need to take a rest. This message
only appears for a short time. If the system
detects further reduction in driving
alertness, it may issue another warning
that remains in the information display for
a longer time. You can press OK on the
steering wheel control to clear the warning.
System Display
When active, the system runs
automatically in the background and only
issues a warning if required. You can view
the status at any time using the
information display. See General
Information (page 93).
The alertness level is shown by six steps
in a colored bar.
E131358
The current assessment of your alertness
is within a typical range.
E131359
The current assessment of your alertness
indicates that you should rest as soon as
safely possible.
The status bar travels from left to right as
the calculated alertness level decreases.
As the meter approaches the rest icon, the
color turns from green to yellow to red.
The yellow position indicates the first
warning is active and the red position
indicates the second warning is active.
Note: If you have recently received a
warning, you should consider resting, even
if the current assessment is within the
typical range.
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings, or if your vehicle speed
drops below approximately 40 mph
(64 km/h), the alertness level changes to
grey for a short time and the information
display informs you that the system is
unavailable.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
•Switching the ignition off and on.
•Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If
Equipped)
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Always drive with due
care and attention when using and
operating the controls and features on your
vehicle.
190
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road
lane markings.
WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in a
false or missed warning.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: When you select aid or alert and aid
mode and the system detects no steering
activity for a short period, the system alerts
you to put your hands on the steering wheel.
The system may detect a light grip or touch
on the steering wheel as hands off driving.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked, or if the windshield is
damaged or dirty.
E249505
When you switch the system on and it
detects an unintentional drift out of your
lane is likely to occur, the system notifies
or assists you to stay in your lane through
the steering system and information
display. In Alert mode, the system provides
a warning by vibrating the steering wheel.
In Aid mode, the system provides steering
assistance by gently counter steering your
vehicle back into the lane.
When the system is functioning in the
combined Alert and Aid mode, the system
first provides steering assistance by gently
counter steering your vehicle back into the
lane, followed by a warning that vibrates
the steering wheel if the vehicle is still out
of the lane marking.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey,
it defaults to on and the mode sets to alert.
E132099
191
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
Press the button on the direction indicator
stalk to switch the system on or off.
System Settings
The system has optional setting menus
available. The system stores the last
known selection for each of these settings.
You do not need to readjust your settings
each time you switch the system on.
Mode: This setting allows you to select
which of the system features you can
enable.
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
E165516
Aid only – Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center when the system
detects an unintended lane departure.
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid – Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center.
If your vehicle continues drifting out of the
lane after the lane keeping aid corrects the
vehicle, the system provides a steering
wheel vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting
does not affect the aid mode.
•Low.
•Normal.
•High.
192
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
System Display
E151660
If you switch the system on in alert mode,
an overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane
markings appears in the information
display.
If you switch the system on in aid or alert
and aid mode, a separate white icon also
appears, or in some vehicles, arrows
appear with the lane markings.
When you switch off the system, the lane
marking graphics do not display.
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings change to indicate the
system status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated side. This
may be because:
•Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
•The direction indicator is active.
•Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
•The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
•The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental, traffic or vehicle
conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or
fog, following a large vehicle that is
blocking or shadowing the lane or poor
headlamp illumination.
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention on the indicated side.
Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
•Quick braking.
•Fast acceleration.
•Using the turn signal indicator.
•Evasive steering maneuver.
•Driving too close to the lane marking.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.
The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
193
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds are present.
There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.
194
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not use the blind spot
information system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before changing
lanes. The blind spot information system
is not a replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
A
A
E124788
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the rear bumper.
Note: The system does not prevent contact
with other vehicles. It is not designed to
detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals
or other infrastructures.
Using the Blind Spot Information
System
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
•You start your vehicle.
•You shift into drive (D).
•The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in park
(P) or reverse (R).
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
•You start your vehicle.
•The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in
reverse (R).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
When the system detects a vehicle, an
alert indicator illuminates in the exterior
mirror on the side the approaching vehicle
is coming from. If you turn the direction
indicator on for that side of your vehicle,
the alert indicator flashes.
195
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The system may not alert you if a
vehicle quickly passes through the detection
zone.
Blocked Sensors
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper
on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
If the sensors are blocked, a message may
appear in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 96). The
alert indicators remain illuminated but the
system does not alert you.
System Errors
If the system detects a fault, a warning
lamp illuminates and a message displays.
See Information Messages (page 96).
Switching the System Off and On
You can switch the system off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 93). When you switch
the system off, a warning lamp illuminates
and a message displays. When you switch
the system on or off, the alert indicators
flash twice.
Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a
trailer tow module and tow bar approved
by us, the system turns off when you attach
a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Do not use the cross
traffic alert system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before reversing
out of a parking space. The cross traffic
alert system is not a replacement for
careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.
The system is designed to alert you of
vehicles approaching from the sides when
you shift into reverse (R).
Using the Cross Traffic Alert
System
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that approach with a speed up to 37 mph
(60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the
sensors are partially, mostly or fully
obstructed. Slowly reversing helps increase
the coverage area and effectiveness.
196
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
The system turns on when you start the
engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
system turns off when you shift out of
reverse (R).
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only
partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.
E142441
197
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at narrow angles. The sensor on
the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and
zone coverage on that side is severely
reduced.
System Lights, Messages and
Audible Alerts
E142442
When the system detects a vehicle, an
indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror
on the side the approaching vehicle is
coming from. A tone sounds and a
message appears in the information
display.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
could alert you even when there is nothing
in the detection zone, for example a vehicle
passing in the distance.
Blocked Sensors
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper
on both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
If the sensors are blocked, a message may
appear in the information display when
you shift into reverse (R). See
Information Messages (page 96).
System Limitations
The system may not correctly operate
when any of the following occur:
•The sensors are blocked.
•Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
are obstructing the sensors.
•Vehicles approach at speeds greater
than 37 mph (60 km/h).
•The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
•You reverse out of an angled parking
space.
System Errors
If the system detects a fault a message
displays. See General Information (page
93).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the system off
using the information display. See General
Information (page 93). When you switch
system off, a message displays. See
Information Messages (page 96).
Note: The system turns on each time you
switch the ignition on and you shift into
reverse (R). If you temporarily switch the
system off, it turns on the next time you
switch the ignition on.
198
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a
trailer tow module and tow bar approved
by us, the system turns off when you attach
a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power
steering system has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If a fault
is detected, a message displays in the
information display. Stop your vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: If the system detects an
error, you may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition may
exist. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible, failure to do so may result in
loss of steering control.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power-assisted steering system. There is
no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving (or if the ignition is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually,
but it takes more effort. Extreme
continuous steering may increase the effort
it takes for you to steer. This occurs to
prevent internal overheating and
permanent damage to your steering
system. If this should occur, you will neither
lose the ability to steer the vehicle
manually nor will it cause permanent
damage. Typical steering and driving
maneuvers will allow the system to cool
and steering assist will return to normal.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
•An improperly inflated tire.
•Uneven tire wear.
•Loose or worn suspension
components.
•Loose or worn steering components.
•Improper vehicle alignment.
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds
may also make the steering seem to
wander or pull.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM
(If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: This system is designed
to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not
intended to replace the driver’s attention,
and judgment, or the need to apply the
brakes. This system does NOT activate the
brakes automatically. Failure to press the
brake pedal to activate the brakes may
result in a collision.
WARNING: The collision warning
system with brake support cannot help
prevent all collisions. Do not rely on this
system to replace driver judgment and the
need to maintain distance and speed.
199
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of the vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h).
E156130
This system is designed to alert the driver
of certain collision risks. A radar detects if
your vehicle is rapidly approaching another
vehicle traveling in the same direction as
yours.
E156131
If it is, a red warning light illuminates and
an audible warning chime sounds.
The brake support system assists the driver
in reducing the collision speed by charging
the brakes. If the risk of collision further
increases after the warning light
illuminates, the brake support prepares
the brake system for rapid braking. This
may be apparent to the driver. The system
does not automatically activate the brakes
but, if the brake pedal is pressed, full force
braking is applied even if the brake pedal
is lightly pressed.
Using the Collision Warning System
WARNING: The collision warning
system’s brake support can only help
reduce the speed at which a collision
occurs if the driver applies the vehicle’s
brakes. The brake pedal must be pressed
just like any typical braking situation.
The warning system sensitivity can be
adjusted to one of three possible settings
by using the information display control.
See General Information (page 93).
Note: If collision warnings are perceived as
being too frequent or disturbing then the
warning sensitivity can be reduced, though
the manufacturer recommends using the
highest sensitivity setting where possible.
Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer
and later system warnings. See General
Information (page 93).
Blocked Sensors
E145632
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
appears in the information display, the
radar signals from the sensor have been
obstructed. The sensors are located behind
a fascia cover near the driver side of the
lower grille. When the sensors are
obstructed, a vehicle ahead cannot be
detected and the collision warning system
does not function. The following table lists
possible causes and actions for this
message being displayed.
200
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is no
longer obstructed
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display
The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Collision warning should automat-
ically reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering
with the radar signals
The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Collision warning should automat-
ically reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals
System Limitations
WARNING: The collision warning
system’s brake support can only help
reduce the speed at which a collision
occurs if the driver applies the vehicle’s
brakes. The brake pedal must be pressed
just like any typical braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
These include:
•Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
•Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
•Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
•Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
•Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
•Small distance to vehicle ahead.
•Steering wheel and pedal movements
are large (very active driving style).
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to
have your collision warning radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
201
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Aids
REAR UNDER FLOOR
STORAGE
Cargo Management System (If
Equipped)
E142445
The system is located in the floor of the
cargo area. Lift the handle to open.
Adjustable Load Floor (If Equipped)
E142446
Vehicles with the standard size spare tire
can adjust the load floor to two positions.
The front of the load floor can be placed
either on (for high position) or below (for
low position) the ledges behind the rear
seats. The rear of the load floor always sits
on the two small shelves located on the
liftgate trim.
LUGGAGE COVERS
WARNING: Make sure that the posts
are properly latched in mounting features.
The cover may cause injury in a sudden
stop or accident if it is not securely
installed.
WARNING: Do not place any objects
on the cargo area shade. They may
obstruct your vision or strike occupants of
your vehicle in a sudden stop or crash.
Use the cargo shade to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.
E142447
Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the
mounting features located behind the rear
seat on the rear trim panels to install the
cargo shade.
To operate the cargo shade:
1. Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade
rearward.
2. Secure both ends of the support rod
into the retention slots located on the
rear quarter trim panels.
202
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS (If Equipped)
WARNING: When loading the roof
racks, we recommend you evenly distribute
the load, as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher
centers of gravity, may handle differently
than unloaded vehicles. Take extra
precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, when driving
a heavily loaded vehicle.
The maximum recommended load, evenly
distributed on the crossbars, is:
•100 lb (45 kg) for vehicles without a
moonroof.
•45 lb (20 kg) for vehicles with a
moonroof.
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel.
For correct roof rack system function, you
must place loads directly on crossbars
affixed to the roof rack side rails. When
using the roof rack system, we recommend
you use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars
designed specifically for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the
load. Check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each fuel stop.
Adjusting the Crossbar (If Equipped)
Note: For less wind noise and better
aerodynamics, only install the crossbars
when you need them for carrying cargo. If
you prefer to keep the crossbars installed,
the front crossbar has two positions. The
front position is quieter for wind noise. The
rear position may help to reduce wind noise
from an open moonroof. Follow the steps
to reposition or remove the front crossbar.
You can remove the rear crossbar fasteners
by unscrewing the assembly.
E142448
1. Remove the crossbar thumbwheels at
both sides of the front crossbar by
turning them counterclockwise.
Note: If you cannot loosen the thumbwheel
with your hand, loosen the fastener head.
You can also use a small screwdriver or
similar tool to loosen the thumbwheel by
inserting the shaft between the two paddles
of the thumbwheel and rotating it loose.
2. Remove the crossbar by sliding the
ends off of the shoulder bolts in the
side rails.
3. Move the crossbar to the new side rail
position and slide the crossbar onto
the shoulder bolt at that position.
4. Replace and tighten the thumbwheels
at both sides of the crossbar by turning
them clockwise until tight. You can use
a small screwdriver or similar tool to
tighten if necessary.
Make sure to check that the thumbwheels
are tight each time you add or remove load
from the roof rack, and periodically while
traveling. Make sure that the load is secure
before traveling.
203
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
Payload
E143816
PAYLOAD
204
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The
label is either on the B-pillar or the
edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and
loading label. Look for “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.
WARNING: The appropriate
loading capacity of your vehicle
can be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable
weight that a single axle (front or
rear) can carry. These numbers
are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. The label is
located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its Gross Axle
Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
The label is located on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
205
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
WARNING: Exceeding the
Safety Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight limits can
adversely affect the performance
and handling of your vehicle,
cause vehicle damage and can
result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is
the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
(or the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR specified
on the certification label.
WARNING: Do not use
replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the
original tires because they may
lower your vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the
original tires do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
206
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
WARNING: Exceeding any
vehicle weight rating can
adversely affect the performance
and handling of your vehicle,
cause vehicle damage and can
result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Helpful examples for calculating
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
207
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: When loading
the roof racks, we recommend you
evenly distribute the load, as well
as maintain a low center of
gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may
handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
208
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer weight
exceeds the limit of your vehicle
and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR specified
on the certification label.
Note: See Recommended
Towing Weights (page 210).
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays,
related to towing. See Fuses
(page 232).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
•Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
•Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
•Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
•Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop and load
capacity. When both the
loaded vehicle and trailer are
connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
204).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
209
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway
control increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford does
not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it when it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed
is too high, the system may turn on multiple
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine
torque to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer
begins to sway, the stability control
warning lamp flashes and a message
appears in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 96). Slow
your vehicle down, pull safely to the side
of the road and check for correct load
distribution.
You can switch this feature off in the
information display. When you switch the
ignition on, the system automatically turns
on.
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle
configuration listed in the chart
below.
Note: Be sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Do not exceed 20 feet2 (1.86
meters2) if your vehicle is not
equipped with a towing package or
30 feet2 (2.79 meters2) if your
vehicle is equipped with a towing
package.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1000 feet (300 meters)
starting at the 1000 foot (300
meter) elevation point.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to activate electric trailer
brakes.
210
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following chart.
Maximum trailer
weight1
Maximum GCWRPowertrain
1500 lb (681 kg)5351 lb (2427 kg)2.5L 2WD
2000 lb (907 kg)5862 lb (2659 kg)1.5L GTDI 2WD
2000 lb (907 kg)5957 lb (2702 kg)
2.0L GTDI 2WD2
3500 lb (1588 kg)7457 lb (3382 kg)
2.0L GTDI 2WD3
2000 lb (907 kg)6005 lb (2724 kg)1.5L GTDI 4WD
2000 lb (907 kg)6091 lb (2763 kg)
2.0L GTDI 4WD2
3500 lb (1588 kg)7591 lb (3443 kg)
2.0L GTDI 4WD3
1Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
2Without trailer towing package.
3 With trailer towing package.
211
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
•Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
•Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
•See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
•Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
•If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
load in the Load Carrying chapter. See
Load Limit (page 204).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector
E168683
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions.
Note: Install the water proof protection cap
back onto the trailer towing connector
whenever it is not in use. This helps to
prevent water damage and trailer towing
connector malfunction.
Note: You cannot use a seven-pin trailer
wiring connector for your vehicle and the
trailer lighting equipment.
FunctionColor
Left direction indicator
and stop lamp
Yellow
Ground (-)White
Right direction indicator
and stop lamp
Green
Running lightsBrown
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
hook retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross
them under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
212
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer's
hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may
not have enough braking power and your
chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 lb (680 kg) when loaded.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any trailer
lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp
wiring; this may damage the electrical
system resulting in fire. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible for
assistance in proper trailer tow wiring
installation. Additional electrical
equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
•Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
•Do not make full-throttle starts.
•Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
•When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
transmission in park (P) to aid engine
and transmission cooling and to help
A/C performance.
•Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
•Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
•If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
•Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
•Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
213
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Towing
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
park (P).
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. Chocks are not
included with your vehicle.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
•Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
•Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
•Causing internal damage to the
components.
•Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground, regardless of the powertrain
and transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
•Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
•Place the transmission in position N. If
you cannot move the transmission into
N, you may need to override it. See
Transmission (page 151).
•Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
•Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
WARNING: If your vehicle has a
steering wheel lock make sure the ignition
is in the accessory or on position when
being towed.
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 108).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.
214
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Towing
Front-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
You must place the front wheels on a
two-wheel tow dolly. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider.
Four-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground), as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
It is recommended to tow your vehicle with
all four (4) wheels off the ground such as
when using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise,
you cannot recreational tow your vehicle.
215
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Your fuel economy is affected by several
things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under, and how you
maintain your vehicle.
You may improve your fuel economy by
keeping these things in mind:
•Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
•Drive at steady speeds without
stopping.
•Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
•Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
•Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
•Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105
km/h]).
•Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
•Use the recommended engine oil.
•Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
economy:
•Sudden accelerations or hard
accelerations.
•Revving the engine before turning it off.
•Idle for periods longer than one minute.
•Warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
•Use the air conditioner or front
defroster.
•Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
•Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
•Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
•Carry unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
weight carried).
•Driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
Conditions
•Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
•Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
•To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
equipped).
•Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
•Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 5–10 mi
(12–16 km) of driving.
•Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.
216
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Hints
•Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
•Four-wheel-drive operation (if
equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
•Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Do not drive through
flowing or deep water as you may lose
control of your vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the front
rocker area of your vehicle.
E266447
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
•Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
•Check that the horn works.
•Check that the exterior lights work.
•Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Use a floor mat designed
to fit the footwell of your vehicle that does
not obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot
move freely can cause loss of vehicle
control and increase the risk of serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Secure the floor mat to
both retention devices so that it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place additional
floor mats or any other covering on top of
the original floor mats. This could result in
the floor mat interfering with the operation
of the pedals. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Always make sure that
objects cannot fall into the driver foot well
while your vehicle is moving. Objects that
are loose can become trapped under the
pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
217
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Hints
E142666
To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
218
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The service is available:
•24 hours a day, seven days a week.
•For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
Roadside Assistance covers:
•A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
•Battery jump start.
•Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
•Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
•Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
•Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
•Roadside Assistance includes up to
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
219
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This
program is eligible within Canada or the
continental United States.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle.
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference.
In Canada, this card is found in the
Warranty Guide in the glove compartment
of your vehicle.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please
refer to the coverage section of your
warranty guide, call us in Canada at
1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at
www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: The hazard flashers operate when
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle
is not running, the battery loses charge. As
a result, there may be insufficient power to
restart your vehicle.
The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your
hazard flashers when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
•Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
•Press the button again to switch them
off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
fuel to the engine in the event of a
moderate to severe crash. Not every
impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.
220
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
If your vehicle has a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch to start position.
3. Switch off the ignition.
4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
fuel pump.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
If your vehicle has a push button start
system:
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and
START/STOP to switch on your
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle
by pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
without pressing the brake pedal.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
WARNING: Use only the specified
jacking points. If you use other positions,
you may damage the body, steering,
suspension, engine, braking system or the
fuel lines.
WARNING: Use only adequately
sized cables with insulated clamps.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle's electrical system.
221
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
To Connect the Booster Cables
A
B
CD
E102925
Flat battery vehicle.A
Booster battery vehicle.B
Positive connection cable.C
Negative connection cable.D
WARNING: Make sure that the
cables are clear of any moving parts and
fuel delivery system parts.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
1. Switch off the engine and any electrical
equipment.
2. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
E152134
3. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
WARNING: Do not connect the end
of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A
spark may cause an explosion of the gases
that surround the battery.
WARNING: Make sure that the
cables are clear of any moving parts and
fuel delivery system parts.
To Start the Engine
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
222
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
Note: Do not switch the headlamps on
when disconnecting the cables. The peak
voltage could blow the bulbs.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
•You press the hazard control button.
•You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
•Your vehicle runs out of power.
•Sounding of the horn is only enabled
in specific markets.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
223
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the
front wheels off the ground. When towing
in this manner, the rear wheels can remain
on the ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive
vehicle requires that all wheels be off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission, all-wheel or
four-wheel drive system and vehicle.
224
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Additional information and resources are
available online:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
•U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
•Owner Manuals.
•Maintenance Schedules.
•Recalls.
•Ford Extended Service Plans.
•Ford Genuine Accessories.
•Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Website
www.ford.ca
Twitter
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
225
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
•Vehicle Identification Number.
•Your telephone number (home and
business).
•The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
•The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
226
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
227
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the
Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Assistance Center:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:
228
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Customer Assistance
E-mailFaxPhone
Customer Relation-
ship Center
apemcrc@ford.comN/AN/AAsia Pacific
expcac@ford.com-+1 313 594 4857
Caribbean and
Central America
menacac@ford.com971 4 3327 266
Ford
Middle East
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441066
UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078
nafcrc@ford.comN/AN/ANorth Africa
prcac@ford.comN/A+1-800-841-3673
Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands
ssacrc@ford.comN/A+1-313-594-4857Sub-Saharan Africa
infokr1@ford.com or
infokr@lincoln.com
N/A+82-02-1600-6003South Korea
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Global Trade Services
by emailing, expcso@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
229
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Customer Assistance
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
230
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-
vehicles.html (English)
Website
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-
automobiles.html (French)
Website
1–800–333–0510Phone
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1–800–565-3673Phone
231
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Pre-Fuse Box
The pre-fuse box is in the engine
compartment attached to the positive
battery post. This box contains several high
current fuses. If you need to replace one
of these high current fuses, see an
authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the
battery before servicing high current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of
electrical shock, always replace the cover
to the power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses
that protect your vehicle's main electrical
systems from overloads.
You will need to reset some features if you
disconnect and reconnect the battery. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 255).
E157389
Lift the release lever at the rear of the cover
to remove it.
232
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Anti-lock brake system and electronic
stability program pump.
50A1
F7
Electronic stability program valve.
30A1
F8
Cooling fan (600 Watt)
40A1
F9
Cooling fan (390 Watt and 750 Watt).
50A1
Heater blower motor.
40A1
F10
Body control module power feed.
30A1
F11
Voltage quality module.
Powertrain control module relay.
30A1
F12
Starter relay.
30A1
F13
Cooling fan (600 Watt and 750 Watt).
25A1
F14
Front cigar lighter or power outlet.
20A1
F15
Front power window (without door control
unit).
25A1
F16
Cooling fan (600 Watt).
40A1
F17
Cooling fan (750 Watt).
50A1
Center power outlet.
20A1
F18
Anti-lock brake system and electronic
stability program 15 feed.
5A2
F19
Horn.
15A2
F20
Stop light switch.
5A2
F21
Battery monitor system.
15A2
F22
Relay coils.
5A2
F23
233
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Light switch module.
5A2
F24
Occupant classification system.
10A2
F25
Oil pump.
25A2
F26
Air conditioner clutch.
15A2
F27
Vehicle power - fuel injector (2.5L engine).
10A2
F28
Blind spot information system and rear
view camera (stop/start equipped
vehicles).
Not used.—F29
Partially heated windshield.
10A2
F30
Powertrain control relay coil.
5A2
F31
Vehicle power (2.0L and 2.5L engine).
15A2
F32
Vehicle power (1.5L engine).
10A2
Vehicle power 2 (2.0L and 2.5L engine).
10A2
F33
Vehicle power 2 (1.5L engine).
15A2
Vehicle power 3.
10A2
F34
Vehicle power 4 (2.0L and 2.5L engine).
15A2
F35
Vehicle power 4 (1.5L engine).
10A2
Active grille shutters.
5A2
F36
Passenger airbag deactivation indicator.
10A2
F37
Engine control module and transmission
control module ignition feed.
5A2
F38
Heated driver seat.
20A2
F39
234
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Electronic power assist steering 15 feed.
5A2
F40
Body control module 15 feed.
20A2
F41
Rear wiper.
15A2
F42
Headlamp control module supply.
15A2
F43
Forward looking radar.
5A2
F44
Heated passenger seat.
20A2
F45
Smart wiper motor modules.
40A1
F46
Not used.—F47
Keypad.
5A2
F48
Cooling fan (750 Watt).Micro relayR1
Horn.Micro relayR2
Not used.—R3
Not used.—R4
Cooling fan (750 Watt).Micro relayR5
Cooling fan (600 Watt and 750 Watt).Micro relayR6
Partially heated windshield.Power relayR7
High current power windows front.Mini RelayR8
Not used.—R9
Starter relay.Mini relayR10
Air conditioner clutch.Micro relayR11
Cooling fan.Power relayR12
Heater blower.Mini relayR13
Engine control relay.Mini relayR14
235
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Cooling fan (600 Watt and 750 Watt).Power relayR15
Ignition 15.Power relayR16
1 Cartridge Fuse
2 Mini Fuse
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is on the right side below
the glove box.
E129926
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Fuel pump supply.20AF56
Not used.—F57
Interior lights relay.5AF58
236
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Passive anti-theft transceiver.5AF59
Interior light.10AF60
Driver door switch pack.
Glove box light.
Overhead console switch bank.
Cigar lighter.20AF61
Power point.
Rain sensor module.5AF62
Light sensor module.
Front sensing module.10AF63
Forward looking radar.
Not used.—F64
Liftgate release.10AF65
Driver door unlock.20AF66
SYNC.7.5AF67
Multifunction display.
Global positioning system module.
Not used (spare).15AF68
Instrument cluster.5AF69
Central lock and unlock supply.20AF70
Heating control head (manual air condi-
tioner).
7.5AF71
Dual electronic automatic temperature
control.
Data link connector.7.5AF72
Steering wheel module.7.5AF73
Headlamp supply.15AF74
Fog lamp.15AF75
Reversing lamp.10AF76
Washer pump.20AF77
Ignition switch.5AF78
237
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Start button.
Keyless vehicle module.
Radio.15AF79
Electronic finish panel.
Hazard light switch.
Door lock switch.
Moonroof supply.20AF80
Radio frequency receiver supply.5AF81
Panorama roof power/open.
Washer pump.20AF82
Central locking.20AF83
Lock/unlock relay.20AF84
Liftgate relay.
Electronic 15 feed.7.5AF85
Airbag module.10AF86
Occupant classification system.
Passenger airbag deactivation indicator.
Heated steering wheel.15AF87
Not used.—F88
Not used.—F89
Luggage Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is in the luggage
compartment behind the passenger side
wheel well. Remove the fuse panel cover
to gain access to the fuses.
238
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
E129927
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Hands-free liftgate entry module.5AF1
Heated outside mirror (without door
control unit).
15AF2
Heated wiper park.
Keyless vehicle door handles.5AF3
Door control unit front left.25AF4
Door control unit front right.25AF5
Door control unit rear left.25AF6
Door control unit rear right.25AF7
Passenger seat.25AF8
Driver seat.25AF9
Driver seat memory module logic feed.5AF10
Rear ignition coil feed.5AF11
Not used.—F12
Not used.—F13
High current power windows (front relay).25AF14
Not used (vehicles with one-touch up
power windows).
—F15
239
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Not used.—F16
Not used.—F17
Not used.—F18
Not used.—F19
Embedded modem.5AF20
Not used.—F21
Heated rear window.25AF22
Audio amplifier.25AF23
DC/AC power converter.30AF24
Trailer tow (vehicles without one-touch up
power windows).
40A
Power liftgate.25AF25
Rear power outlet.20AF26
Luggage compartment power outlet.20AF27
Trailer tow (vehicles with one-touch up
power windows).
40AF28
Driver and passenger high current power
windows (vehicles without one-touch up
power windows).
30A
Blind spot detection system.5AF29
Rear view camera with park assist.
Parking aid module.5AF30
Not used.—F31
DC/AC power converter.5AF32
High current power window switch.10AF33
Not used.—F34
Not used.—F35
Not used.—F36
240
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay
Number
Not used.—F37
Not used.—F38
Not used.—F39
Not used.—F40
Not used.—F41
Not used.—F42
Not used.—F43
Not used.—F44
Not used.—F45
Heated outside mirror relay coil.5AF46
Delay accessory relay.Power relayR1
Rear 15 relay.Mini relayR2
Heated rear window relay.Micro relayR3
Not used.—R4
Not used.—R5
Heated outside mirror relay.Micro relayR6
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse
with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
241
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
Fuse Types
E207206
Fuse TypeCallout
Micro 2A
Micro 3B
MaxiC
MiniD
M CaseE
J CaseF
J Case Low ProfileG
242
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
•Do not work on a hot engine.
•Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
•Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
•Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E142457
1. Pull the hood release lever.
2. Slightly lift the hood.
243
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
E142458
3. Move the catch to the right to release
the hood.
E87786
4. Open the hood and support it with the
hood strut.
Closing the Hood
1. Remove the hood strut from the catch
and secure it correctly in the clip.
2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last
8–12 in (20–30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
244
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
E280039
Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page
250).
A
Windshield washer fluid. See
Washer Fluid Check (page 255).
B
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 248).
C
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 248).
D
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 254).
E
Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 255).
F
Power distribution box. See
Changing a Fuse (page 241).
G
Air filter. See Changing the
Engine Air Filter (page 266).
H
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
245
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
E146022
Engine coolant reservoir: See
Engine Coolant Check (page
250).
A
Engine oil dipstick: See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 248).
B
Brake fluid reservoir: See Brake
Fluid Check (page 254).
C
Battery: See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 255).
D
Power distribution box: See
Fuses (page 232).
E
Air filter assembly: See
Changing the Engine Air Filter
(page 266).
F
Engine oil filler cap: See Engine
Oil Check (page 248).
G
Windshield washer fluid
reservoir: See Washer Fluid
Check (page 255).
H
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.5L
246
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
E260255
Windshield washer fluid
reservoir: See Washer Fluid
Check (page 255).
A
Engine coolant reservoir: See
Engine Coolant Check (page
250).
B
Engine oil filler cap: See Engine
Oil Check (page 248).
C
Engine oil dipstick: See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 248).
D
Brake fluid reservoir: See Brake
Fluid Check (page 254).
E
Battery: See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 255).
F
Power distribution box: See
Fuses (page 232).
G
Air filter assembly: See
Changing the Engine Air Filter
(page 266).
H
247
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.5L
ECOBOOST™
E250657
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™/2.5L
E250320
Minimum.A
Nominal.B
Maximum.C
ENGINE OIL CHECK
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 243).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
Hood Overview (page 244).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See Under
Hood Overview (page 244).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 308).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
248
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 244).
Turn it counterclockwise and remove
it.
3. Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 308). You may
have to use a funnel to pour the engine
oil into the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Oil Life
Press and hold the OK
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indic-
ator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
249
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Action and descriptionMessage
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
cooling system to cool down. Cover the
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
prevent the possibility of scalding and
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in the
windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on
the windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling system is
under pressure. Steam and hot liquid can
come out forcefully when you loosen the
cap slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 455).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine
coolant when the engine is hot. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
cooling system to cool down. Cover the
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
prevent the possibility of scalding and
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Take care not to put
engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir or windshield washer fluid in
the engine coolant reservoir.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
250
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
It is very important to use prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification in order to avoid plugging the
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 301). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 301).
Using water that has not been deionised
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to our
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the
following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to
the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
301).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
In this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
•Alcohol.
•Methanol.
•Brine.
•Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
251
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community's regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
•It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
•A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
•You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
•Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
Coolant Change
At specific mileage intervals, as listed in
the scheduled maintenance information,
the coolant should be changed. Add
prediluted coolant approved to the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 301).
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and
a message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
•Engine power is limited.
•The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
252
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use
during emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a
safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will
have limited power, will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
cooling system to cool down. Cover the
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
prevent the possibility of scalding and
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
crash and injury, be prepared that the
vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle
may not be able to accelerate with full
power until the coolant temperature
reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no
need to stop your vehicle. You can
continue to drive.
253
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
The air conditioning may automatically
turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant
temperature decreases to the normal
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. After
several minutes, if the temperature
does not drop, follow the remaining
steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 455). Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips, shifts
slowly or if you notice a sign of leaking
fluid, contact an authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNING: Do not use any fluid
other than the recommended brake fluid
as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid from
a sealed container. Contamination with
dirt, water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to
touch your skin or eyes. If this happens,
rinse the affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
WARNING: A fluid level between the
MAX and MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need to
add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.
254
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
E170684
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 301).
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your
vehicle in temperatures below 41.0°F
(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
our specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 301).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in personal
injury and damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or
with your hands on opposite corners.
255
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
WARNING: This vehicle may have
more than one battery. Removing the
battery cables from only one battery does
not disconnect your vehicle electrical
system. Make sure you disconnect the
battery cables from all batteries when
disconnecting power. Failure to do so may
cause serious personal injury or property
damage.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
When a battery replacement is required,
you must use a recommended
replacement battery that matches the
electrical requirements of the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the
battery, make sure you reinstall the battery
cover or shield.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect the low voltage battery performance
and durability. This may also affect the
performance of other electrical systems in
the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained
by power from the battery. When the
battery is disconnected or a new battery
is installed, the engine must relearn its idle
and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. Flexible fuel
vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the
ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance.
To restore the settings, do the following:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. Reset the
power windows bounce-back feature.
See Windows and Mirrors (page 83).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 321).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km)
to completely relearn the idle trim and
fuel trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
256
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may experience poor
starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and
ethanol content have been relearned.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Battery Management System (If
Equipped)
The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery
drain is detected, the system temporarily
disables some electrical systems to
protect the battery.
Systems included are:
•Heated rear window.
•Heated seats.
•Climate control.
•Heated steering wheel.
•Audio unit.
•Navigation system.
A message may appear in the information
displays to alert you that battery
protection actions are active. These
messages are only for notification that an
action is taking place, and not intended to
indicate an electrical problem or that the
battery requires replacement.
After battery replacement, or in some
cases after charging the battery with an
external charger, the battery management
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep
time to relearn the battery state of charge.
During this time your vehicle must remain
fully locked with the ignition switched off.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state
of charge, the battery management system
may temporarily disable some electrical
systems.
Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection
directly to the battery negative post. This
can cause inaccurate measurements of
the battery condition and potential
incorrect system operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
257
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
You can improve poor wiper quality by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
Replace the wiper blades at least annually
for optimum performance.
Front Wiper Blades
E129990
1
1
2
1. Lift the wiper arm and then press the
wiper blade locking buttons together.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
Rear Window Wiper Blade
E271380
1. Lift the wiper arm.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident, the
alignment of your headlamps should be
checked by your authorized dealer.
258
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Center height of lamp to groundB
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
Vehicles With Halogen Headlamps
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
bulb center from the ground and mark
an 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp when adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the right hand
portion of the beam pattern. If the top
edge of the high intensity light zone is
not at the horizontal reference line, the
headlamp does need to be adjusted.
E142467
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to aim the headlamp. The horizontal
edge of the brighter light should touch
the horizontal reference line.
6. Close the hood and switch off the
lamps.
259
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Vehicles With High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
bulb center from the ground and mark
an 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp when adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood.
E142466
4. There is a distinct cut-off (change from
light to dark) in the left portion of the
beam pattern. The top edge of this
cut-off should be positioned 2 in
(5 cm) below the horizontal reference
line.
E142467
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to aim the headlamp.
6. Close the hood and switch off the
lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is non-adjustable.
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to
accommodate normal changes in
pressure. Condensation can be a natural
by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the
vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the
temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
thin mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
260
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
•Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip
marks or droplets).
•Fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable moisture
(usually caused by a lamp water leak) are:
•Water puddle inside the lamp.
•Large water droplets, drip marks or
streaks present on the interior of the
lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if
any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs
WARNING: Make sure the bulbs
have cooled down before removing them.
Failure to follow this warning could result
in serious personal injury.
Note: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb
carefully and keep out of children’s reach.
Grasp the bulb by only its plastic base and
do not touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to break the next
time the headlamps are operated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it
should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol
before being used.
Headlamp:
A B C
E142469
Side markerA
Low beam headlampB
High beam headlamp
(Halogen)/Cornering lamp (HID)
C
High beam headlamp (Halogen):
2 4
E142470
1. Remove service cap.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove bulb from the headlamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise, then pull it straight
out.
Low beam headlamp (Halogen):
261
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
2 4
E142471
1. Reposition the coolant reservoir tank
by lifting and rotating inward to provide
more hand clearance. (Right side only)
2. Remove service cap.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove bulb from the headlamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise, then pull it straight
out.
Install the new bulbs in reverse order from
the steps above. Be sure that the spring
clip is not damaged or detached from the
headlamp assembly during the
replacement procedure.
Cornering Lamp (HID Headlamps)
1. Remove service cap.
2. Disconnect electrical connector.
3. Release spring clip and rotate away
from the assembly.
4. Pull bulb straight out toward the rear
of the vehicle.
Replacing HID Headlamp Bulbs (If
Equipped)
The low beam headlamps on your vehicle
use a high intensity discharge source.
These lamps operate at a high voltage.
When the bulb is burned out, the bulb and
starter capsule assembly must be replaced
by your authorized dealer.
Replacing Side Marker Bulbs
E142472
1. Remove the bulb socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
2. Remove the bulb by gently pulling the
bulb straight out of the socket.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing Fog, Park and Turn
Signal Bulbs
A
B
E245248
Fog LampA
Park/Turn LampB
1. Remove fog lamp bezel by prying away
from the bumper fascia.
262
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
E255385
2. Remove the screws and remove the
fog lamp assembly.
E245249
3. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder
by pulling it straight out.
Install the new bulbs in reverse order from
the steps above.
Replacing Turn Signal Bulbs
E255368
Turn lampA
Side markerB
2
3
E142473
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in
the off position and open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two bolt covers using a
standard flat tip screwdriver.
3. Remove the two bolts from the lamp
assembly.
263
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
4. Gently pull the lamp assembly away
from the vehicle.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Remove the turn signal bulb by turning
the lower bulb socket
counterclockwise. Gently pull the bulb
straight out of the socket.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing Reverse Lamp Assembly
For bulb replacement, see your authorized
dealer.
Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulb
3
2
1
E72789
1. Carefully release the spring clip.
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Remove the bulb.
Reverse steps to reinstall bulb.
Replacing High-Mount Brake Lamp
Bulb
Your vehicle is equipped with an LED
center high-mount stop lamp located in
the spoiler. It is designed to last the life of
the vehicle. If replacement is required, see
your authorized dealer.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for
North America to ensure lamp
performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will
not damage the lamp assembly or void the
lamp assembly warranty and will provide
quality bulb burn time.
Trade numberFunction
9005LLHeadlamps high beam (Halogen Reflector)
H9Headlamps high beam (Halogen Protector)
H1* Headlamps cornering (HID)
H11LLHeadlamp low beam (Halogen Reflector)
9005HL+Headlamp low beam (Halogen Protector)
D3S* Headlamp low beam (HID)
168Sidemarker - front
7444NATurn lamp - front (with fog lamp)
W21/5WTurn lamp - front (without fog lamp)
H11Fog lamps
264
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Trade numberFunction
LED* Tail/brake lamp
WY21WTurn lamp - rear
921Backup lamp
W5WLicense plate lamp
W5WRear side marker
LED* High-mount brake lamp
LED* Interior lamps
* To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
265
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
301).
For EcoBoost equipped vehicles: When
servicing the air cleaner, it is important that
no foreign material enter the air induction
system. The engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even small
particles.
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 455).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if the
correct air filter element is not used.
EcoBoost Engines
E171370
1. Loosen the four fasteners and remove
the air cleaner assembly lid.
2. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
3. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air
cleaner assembly to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and to make sure you
have a good seal.
E170433
4. Install the new air filter element. Slide
the open end of the air filter element
in first, below the tab. Then push the
closed end of the air filter into the
bottom of the tray. The closed end
should fit inside the groove in the tray.
The tab of the closed end of the air
filter should be oriented down and fit
between the forks on the tray as shown
at the arrow above.
266
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
Note: Make sure you align the tab in the air
filter element with the fork in the air cleaner
assembly tray.
5. Install the air cleaner assembly lid and
tighten the four fasteners.
Duratec Engines
E142711
1. Detach the 2 clips that secure the air
filter cover to the housing.
2. Carefully remove the air filter cover
from the housing. Do not detach any
connections or tubes from the cover.
3. Remove the air cleaner from the
housing.
4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure that
no dirt gets into the engine.
5. Load the air filter into the housing.
6. Replace the air filter cover and secure
the clips.
267
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M5B194-BMotorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P3-AMotorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-
A/B/D/F (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
•Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
•Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
268
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
•Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
•Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
•Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
•When filling with AdBlue®, remove any
residue on painted surfaces
immediately.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.
Exterior Chrome Parts
•Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
•Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
•Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
•Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
•Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
•Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
•Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Regularly clean the underside of your
vehicle using water. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
269
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
•Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
•Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
•Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
•Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
•Roof racks.
•Bumpers.
•Grained door handles.
•Side moldings.
•Mirror housings.
•Windshield cowl area.
•Do not apply wax to glass areas.
•After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
•Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
•Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
•Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
•Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
•Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
•Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
270
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
•Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
•For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
•Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
the belt webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the side
airbag system and affect performance of
the side airbag in a crash.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
equipped with side airbags:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
•Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
•If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
•If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
•Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when
cleaning the steering wheel or instrument
panel to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 272).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
271
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
•Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
•Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
•Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
•Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
•Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
•Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
•Household cleaners.
•Alcohol solutions.
•Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
272
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE WHEELS (If
Equipped)
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use
Ford approved wheel cleaner if
available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you
use Ford approved bug and tar remover
if available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
after cleaning.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This
reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake
discs, brake pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
General
•Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
•Protect from sunlight, if possible.
•If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
•Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
•Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
•Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
•Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
•Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
273
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
•Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
•Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
•Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
•Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
•With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
•We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
•Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
•Protect against freezing temperatures.
•When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
•Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
•If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
•Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
•Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
•Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
•Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
•Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
•Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
•Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
•Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
•Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
•Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
274
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
•Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
•If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
275
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the
tires from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. If you intend to change the size of
the wheels from that fitted by the
manufacturer, you can check the suitability
with an authorized dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 278).
You can find the recommended tire
inflation pressures can on the Tire Label,
which is on the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver door. You can also find this
information on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door latch post;
next to the driver seating position.
We strongly recommend maintaining these
tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow
the tire pressure recommendations can
cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced
fuel economy, and adversely affect the
way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
If your vehicle has a spare tire, set the
pressure to the highest value given for your
vehicle and tire size combination.
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive
vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at
a safe speed.
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
276
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.
Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive
vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at
a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive,
when selected, has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power transfer
unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you
to select different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel
Drive (page 155). For information on
transfer case maintenance, See
Maintenance (page 243). You should
become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your
vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the
initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel
drive when the vehicle is moving can cause
a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not
cause for concern.
In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the
spare tire relative to the remaining tires can
have an effect on the 4x4 system. If there
is a significant difference between the size
of a spare and the remaining tires,
four-wheel drive functionality may be
limited. See Principle of Operation (page
155).
How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
•Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
•Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
•Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded
condition. These differences that make
your vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
277
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1½ times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction
grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
278
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature
grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
279
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
* B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
CDEFG
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
280
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
Speed ratingLetter
rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
281
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Speed ratingLetter
rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and indicates that
the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers
or letters are the plant code
designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are
the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), for the correct tire
pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
282
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
BC
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
283
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual,
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A
BCDE
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
284
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Recommended Tire Pressures
and Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check the pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.
WARNING: Under-inflation
is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe
tire cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge. Use the
recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. You
will find a Tire Label containing
the Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure by the tire size
and other important information
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door.
285
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
The Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure is also found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch on the
B-pillar, or on the edge of the
driver’s door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread
will appear on the tire when the
tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
286
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected, have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING: Tires degrade
over time depending on many
factors such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years regardless
of tread wear. However, heat
caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process
and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if
it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
287
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: Only use
replacement tires and wheels that
are the same size, load index,
speed rating and type (such as
P-metric versus LT-metric or
all-season versus all-terrain) as
those originally provided by Ford.
The recommended tire and wheel
size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the
Tire Label which is located on the
B-Pillar or edge of the driver's
door. If this information is not
found on these labels, then you
should contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Use of
any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect
the safety and performance of
your vehicle, which could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: To reduce the
risk of serious injury, when
mounting replacement tires and
wheels, you should not exceed the
maximum pressure indicated on
the sidewall of the tire to set the
beads without additional
precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
WARNING: For a mounting
pressure more than 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer
or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
WARNING: Always inflate
steel carcass tires with a remote
air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
WARNING: When inflating
the tire for mounting pressures up
to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than
the maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
•Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
•Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
•Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
•Use both eye and ear
protection.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
It is recommended that the two
front tires or two rear tires
generally be replaced as a pair.
288
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, your
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is
stuck in snow, mud or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the
wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive,
there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
289
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment
of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear, ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life. Sometimes
irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page
455).
E142547
290
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the
same size, load index, speed rating as
those originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and
specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and traction devices
•If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle
•Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions.
•Use 10 mm cables or chains only on
front axle with 235/55R17 tires.
•Not all S-class snow chains or cables
meet these restrictions. Chains of this
size restriction will include a tensioning
device.
•The snow chains or cables must be
mounted in pairs on the front axle.
•Do not use chains or cables on
235/50R18 and 235/45R19 tires.
•Install cables securely, verifying that
the cables do not touch any wiring,
brake lines or fuel lines.
•When driving with tire cables do not
exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the
maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
•Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
rub or bang against the vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If this does not
work, remove the cables to prevent
vehicle damage.
•Remove the cables when they are no
longer needed. Do not use cables on
dry roads.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
maintain tire pressures could increase the
risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system
sensor becomes damaged, it may not
function.
291
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Each tire, including the spare, if
provided, should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label.
Installation of any tires that are not the
original equipment tire size can cause the
speedometer to display incorrect vehicle
speed.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
292
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically, at
least monthly, using an accurate tire gauge.
See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning
light will turn on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, your tires are under-inflated
and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
293
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure
warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label, located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar,
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires, such as at
a gas station or in your garage, the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
294
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa)
from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as
being significantly lower than the
recommended inflation pressure and
activate the system warning light for low
tire pressure. If the low tire pressure
warning light is on, visually check each tire
to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check
the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire
is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle
to the nearest location where air can be
added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended inflation pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
maintain tire pressures could increase the
risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
WARNING: If the tire pressure
monitor sensor becomes damaged it may
not function.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light illuminates when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
tire pressure monitoring system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 291). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor for
damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
295
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
•Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
•Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
•Tow a trailer.
•Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
•Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
•Use commercial car washing
equipment.
•Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking
performance.
•Comfort and noise.
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
•Winter weather driving capability.
•Wet weather driving capability.
•All-wheel driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
•Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
•Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
•Use commercial car washing
equipment.
•Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking
performance.
•Comfort and noise.
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
•Winter weather driving capability.
•Wet weather driving capability.
•All-wheel driving capability
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
•Towing a trailer.
•Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
•Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and the ground.
WARNING: Never place anything
between the vehicle jack and your vehicle.
296
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: It is recommended that
the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and
that no person should remain in a vehicle
that is being jacked.
WARNING: The jack supplied with
this vehicle is only intended for changing
wheels. Do not use the vehicle jack other
than when you are changing a wheel in an
emergency.
WARNING: Check that the vehicle
jack is not damaged or deformed and the
thread is lubricated and clean.
WARNING: The jack should be used
on level firm ground wherever possible.
WARNING: Use only the specified
jacking points. If you use other positions,
you may damage the body, steering,
suspension, engine, braking system or the
fuel lines.
WARNING: No person should place
any portion of their body under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
Note: The jack does not require
maintenance or additional lubrication over
the service life of your vehicle.
E166722
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
3. Lift and remove the carpeted cargo
area floor to access the spare tire and
jack.
4. Remove the wing nut that secures the
spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise. Remove the spare
tire.
E160855
5. Remove the jack from the foam holder.
Remove the flat tire retainer strap from
the jack base. The lug wrench is in the
left side storage foam next to the spare
tire.
E159432
6. Unfold the lug wrench for use.
297
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E142551
7. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
8. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised
off the ground.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
9. The vehicle jacking points shown here
are also depicted on the warning label
on the jack. Small arrow-shaped marks
on the vehicle sills show the location
of the jacking points.
E145908
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise
the vehicle until the flat tire is
completely off the ground.
E273178
11. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
Note: If equipped with full wheel covers
with exposed wheel nuts, remove the wheel
nuts prior to removing the wheel cover or
damage to the wheel cover may occur.
12. Replace the flat tire with the spare
tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
until the wheel has been lowered.
13. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1
2
34
5
E75442
298
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
14. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page
299).
Stowing the flat tire
1. Put the jack and lug wrench away.
Make sure the jack is fastened so it
does not rattle when you drive.
2. Unblock the wheels.
3. Stow the flat tire on the floor in the
cargo area. Secure with the flat tire
retainer strap by following the next
steps:
E142906
4. Locate the cargo tie-down near the
seatback. Push the loop of the retainer
strap through the tie-down. Thread the
non-loop end through the loop.
E157926
5. Weave the retainer strap through the
wheel openings.
6. Locate the front cargo tie-down at the
opposite corner of the cargo area to
the tie-down used in Step 4. Thread
the retainer strap through the tie-down
and pull tight.
7. Secure by tying a 2-half hitch knot.
E143746
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
299
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign
materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces
of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while
your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
Ib-ft (Nm)*
Bolt size
100 (135)M12 x 1.5
*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
E145950
Wheel pilot bore.A
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
300
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
SpecificationMeasurement
92Cubic inches.
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel.
10.0:1Compression ratio.
1-3-4-2Firing order.
0.025-0.029 in. (0.65- 0.75 mm)Spark plug gap.
Drivebelt Routing
E251823
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
SpecificationMeasurement
122Cubic inches.
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel.
9.3:1Compression ratio.
1-3-4-2Firing order.
0.027 - 0.031 in. (0.70 - 0.80 mm)Spark plug gap.
301
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
E161383
A
B
The long drivebelt is on the first
pulley groove closest to the
engine.
A.
The short drivebelt is on the
second pulley groove farthest
from engine.
B.
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.5L
SpecificationMeasurement
152Cubic inches.
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel.
9.7:1Compression ratio.
1-3-4-2Firing order.
0.049 - 0.053 in. (1.25 - 1.35 mm)Spark plug gap.
302
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
E161383
A
B
The long drivebelt is on the first
pulley groove closest to the
engine.
A.
The short drivebelt is on the
second pulley groove farthest
from the engine.
B.
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
Motorcraft Part numberComponent
FA-1908Air filter element.
FL-910-SOil filter.
BAGM-48H6-760Battery.
SP-539Spark plugs.
FP-70Cabin air filter.
WW-2750 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2705 (passenger side)
WW-1106 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at
the appropriate intervals.
303
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Motorcraft Part numberComponent
FA-1908Air filter element.
FL-910-SOil filter.
BAGM-48H6-760Battery.
SP-537Spark plugs.
FP-70Cabin air filter.
WW-2750 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade.
WW-2705 (passenger side)
WW-1106 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at
the appropriate intervals.
304
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.5L
Motorcraft Part NumberComponent
FA-1910Air filter element
FL-910-SOil filter
BXT-96R-590Battery
SP-530Spark plugs
FP-70Cabin air filter
WW-2750 (driver side)
Windshield wiper blade WW-2705 (passenger side)
WW-1106 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at
the appropriate intervals.
305
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
306
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
6Six-speed automatic transmission 6F35
307
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high
pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
5.0 qt (4.75 L)Engine oil (with oil filter).
12.5 qt (11.8 L)Engine coolant.
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid.
2.4 pt (1.15 L)Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive).
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid.
9.0 qt (8.5 L) 1
Automatic transmission fluid.
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid.
15.7 gal (59.4 L)Fuel tank.
22 oz (0.62 kg)A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Canada).
24 oz (0.68 kg)A/C refrigerant (Mexico).
2.7 fl oz (80 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
308
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-B1Motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-Q1SP
WSS-M2C945-B1Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Blend Motor
Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-B1Motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
MXO-5W20-Q1SP
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S.):
309
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
YN-33-A
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSS-M2C300-A2A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada):
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
YN-35
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
-Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
-Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
310
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
•Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN PLUS requirements and display the
API Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
E142732
E275759
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
311
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C947-B1
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil:
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-20
XO-0W20-Q1SP
E240522
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high
pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
5.7 qt (5.4 L)Engine oil (with oil filter).
10.9 qt (10.3 L)Engine coolant.
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid.
2.4 pt (1.15 L)Rear differential fluid.
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid.
312
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
9.0 qt (8.5 L) 1
Automatic transmission fluid.
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid.
15.7 gal (59.4 L)Fuel tank.
22 oz (0.62 kg)A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Canada).
24 oz (0.68 kg)A/C refrigerant (Mexico).
2.7 fl oz (80 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-B1Motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-B1Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-B1Motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
313
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential fluid (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
MXY-80W90-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
YN-33-A
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSS-M2C300-A2A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada):
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
314
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
YN-35
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
-Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
-Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
-Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
•Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN Plus requirements and display the
API Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
315
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C953-A1
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30
XO-0W30-QSP
E240523
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.5L
316
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high
pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
5.7 qt (5.4 L)Engine oil (with oil filter).
11.3 qt (10.7 L)Engine coolant.
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid.
9.0 qt (8.5 L) 1
Automatic transmission fluid.
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid.
15.7 gal (59.4 L)Fuel tank.
22 oz (0.62 kg)A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Canada).
24 oz (0.68 kg)A/C refrigerant (Mexico).
4.5 fl oz (133 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-B1Motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-B1Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Blend Motor
Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-B1Motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W20-QSP
317
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON® LVMotorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
YN-33-A
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSS-M2C300-A2A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada):
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
YN-35
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
318
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
-Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
-Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
-Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
•Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN Plus requirements and display the
API Certification Mark for gasoline engines.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
319
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C947-B1
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine oil - SAE 0W-20
XO-0W20-QSP
E240522
320
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
•AM: 530-1710 kHz
•FM: 87.9-107.9 MHz
Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in the
vehicle’s CD player.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an
authorized dealer for more information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of
the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in
a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
321
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
•There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
MP3 and WMA folder mode.
•MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3
and WMA track on the disc (noted by
the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
model of radio present.
•MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
•Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how
the system reads the structures you create.
While various files may be present (files
with extensions other than MP3 and
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA
extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in-vehicle
system.
In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Depending on your vehicle options,
your system may look different from what
you see here.
322
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
E249988
Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.
A
Function buttons: Select
different functions of the audio
system depending on which
mode you are in (such as Radio
mode or CD mode).
B
CD slot: Insert a CD.C
Eject: Press to eject a CD.D
Number block: In radio mode,
you can store your favorite radio
stations. To store a radio station,
tune to the station, then press
and hold a preset button until
sound returns. In CD mode,
select a track. In phone mode,
enter a phone number.
E
323
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
Tune and Play or Pause: In
radio mode, press to search
through the radio frequency
band. In media mode, turn to
select a new track. Press to
either play or pause a track. This
button also mutes the radio
sources.
F
Phone: Press to access the
phone features of the SYNC
system. See your SYNC
information.
G
Menu: Press to access different
audio system features.
H
Clock: Press to access the clock
setting. Use the center arrow
controls to change the hours and
minutes. You can also set the
clock by pressing MENU and
scrolling to Clock Settings. If not
in phone mode, press to display
the clock.
I
Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse: In radio mode, select
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In CD mode, press to
select the next or previous track.
Press and hold to move quickly
forward or backward through the
current track.
J
OK and cursor arrows: Press
the up and down arrow buttons
to select the various settings.
When you make your selection,
press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings.
Press OK to set, or press MENU
to exit.
K
Sound: Press to access settings
for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
and Balance. Use the up and
down arrow buttons to select
the various settings. When you
make your selection, press the
L
left and right arrow buttons to
change the settings. Press OK to
set or press MENU to exit.
Sound settings can be set for
each audio source
independently.
Radio: Press to listen to the
radio or change radio stations.
Press the function buttons
below the radio screen to select
different radio functions.
M
Media: Press to open the media
source menu. You can press this
multiple times to change to CD
or to a SYNC-Media device or
scroll through the media sources
using the arrow buttons. Press
OK to select a source.
N
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/
TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
324
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features. See your SYNC
information.
E185024
TUNE: In radio mode, press to
search through the radio
frequency band. In SIRIUS mode,
press to find the previous or next
available satellite radio station.
A
CD slot: Insert a CD.B
Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.
C
SOURCE: Press to access
different audio modes, for
example AM, FM and CD.
D
Eject: Press to eject a CD.E
DISP: Press to switch the
display screen on and off.
F
SOUND: Press to access
settings for Treble, Midrange,
Bass, Fade or Balance.
G
Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse: In radio mode, select
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press
H
to select the next or previous
satellite radio station. If you
select a specific category (such
as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous station
in the category you select. In CD
mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or
backward through the current
track.
325
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AUDIO SYSTEM
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features. See your SYNC
information.
Note: The CD slot is directly above the
touchscreen.
E143844
Power: Press to switch the
system on and off.
A
SOURCE: Press to access
different audio modes, for
example AM, FM, Media, and
Satellite Radio.
B
Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse: In radio mode, select
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press
C
to select the next or previous
satellite radio station. If you
select a specific category (such
as jazz, rock or news), press to
326
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
find the next or previous station
in the category you select. In CD
mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or
backward through the current
track.
TUNE: In radio mode, press to
search through the radio
frequency band. In SIRIUS mode,
press to find the previous or next
available satellite radio station.
D
Volume: Turn to adjust the
volume.
E
SOUND: Press to access
settings for Treble, Midrange,
Bass, Fade or Balance.
F
Eject: Press to eject a CD.G
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
from what you see here.
327
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
E225879
Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.
A
CD slot: Insert a CD.B
Eject: Press to eject a CD.C
Memory presets: Store your
favorite radio stations. To store
a radio station, tune to the
station, then press and hold a
preset button until sound
returns.
D
TUNE and Play or Pause: In
radio mode, turn to search the
frequency band in individual
increments. Press to mute the
station. In media mode, turn to
select a new track. Press to
either play or pause a track. This
button also mutes the radio
sources.
E
MENU: Press to access different
audio system features. See
Menu Structure.
F
328
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
INFO: Press to access any
available radio or CD
information.
G
Clock: Press to access the clock
setting. Use the center arrow
controls to change the hours and
minutes. You can also set the
clock by pressing MENU and
scrolling to Clock Settings. If not
in phone mode, press to display
the clock.
H
OK and cursor arrows: Press
the up and down arrow buttons
to select the various settings.
When you make your selection,
press the left and right arrow
buttons to change the settings.
Press OK to set, or press MENU
to exit.
I
Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse: In radio mode, select
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press
J
to select the next or previous
satellite radio station. If a
specific category is selected
(such as jazz, rock or news),
press to find the next or previous
station in the selected category.
In CD mode, press to select the
next or previous track. Press and
hold to move quickly forward or
backward through the current
track.
SOUND: Press to access
settings for Treble, Midrange,
Bass, Fade and Balance. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to
select the various settings. When
you make your selection, press
K
the left and right arrow buttons
to change the settings. Press OK
to set or press MENU to exit.
Sound settings can be set for
each audio source
independently.
RADIO: Press to listen to the
radio or change radio stations.
Press the function buttons
below the radio screen to select
different radio functions.
L
MEDIA: Press to open the media
source menu. You can press this
multiple times to change to CD
or to a SYNC-Media device or
scroll through the media sources
using the arrow buttons. Press
OK to select a source.
M
Menu Structure
Note: Depending on your system, some
options may appear slightly different.
Press MENU.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the options.
Press the right arrow to enter a menu.
Press the left arrow to exit a menu.
Press OK to confirm a selection.
329
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
Radio
Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the
frequency band.
Manual Tune
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan
Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM-
AST and FM-AST frequency bands.
AST
Select to have the system search by certain music
categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country).
Set Category for Seek/Scan
Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This
feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a
category.
RDS Text Display
SIRIUS
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan
Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number
(ESN). You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS to activate, modify or track your account.
Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK
to open a list of the following options for this channel.
Once you skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by
pressing Direct Tune and entering the channel number.
Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN.
Check Channel Guide
Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or
News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions
only stop on channels in that category.
Set Category for Seek/Scan
Select to switch alerts on or off for songs, artists or teams.
The system alerts you when the selection is playing on
another channel. Save up to 20 alerts.
Alerts
Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations.Unlock All Stations
Use to restore any channels you previously skipped.Skip No Stations
Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock
channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.
Parental Lockout
330
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
Audio Settings
Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for
speed and wind noise. You can set the system between
0 and +7.
Speed Compensated
Volume
Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
or Balance.
Sound
Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating
position.
Occupancy Mode
Choose between the stereo modes.DSP
CD Settings
Select to scan all disc selections.Scan All
Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.Scan Folder
Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
CD Compression
Clock Settings
Select to set the time and calendar date.Set Date and Time
Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour
mode.
24 Hour
Display Settings
Select to change display brightness.Brightness
Select to display the language in English, French or
Spanish.
Language
Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit
or Celsius.
Temp. Setting
331
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
DIGITAL RADIO (If Equipped)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
•Scan allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
•Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access a station you save if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
332
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
333
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
Potential Station Issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment
by the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
No action required. The
station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
There is no text information
shown for currently selected
frequency.
No action required. This is
normal behavior.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel search.
HD2-HD7 stations not found
when Scan is pressed.
*http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS Ford Motor Company
and DTS are not responsible for the
content sent using HD Radio technology.
Content may be changed, added or deleted
at any time at the station owner's
discretion.
SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a
variety of music, news, sports, weather,
traffic and entertainment satellite radio
channels. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,
or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
334
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E208625
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.
335
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module
or system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer
available.
Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SiriusXM satellite or Siri-
usXM tower to your vehicle
antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the
selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated
336
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
USB PORT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E201595
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See your SYNC
information.
337
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
E198355
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player.
This allows you to:
•Make and receive calls.
•Access and play music from your
portable music player.
•Use 911 Assist and applications, via
SYNC Applink .*
•Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
•Stream music from your connected
phone.
•Text message.
•Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
•Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
*These features are not available in all
markets and may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
338
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
•Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
•Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
•Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
•Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
339
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist.
See SYNC™ Applications and Services
(page 354).
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is around you.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Press the voice button. A list of
available voice commands
appears in the display.
Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.
Global voice commands
This command ends the voice session. You
can also cancel a session by holding the
voice button for two or more seconds.
(cancel | exit)
This command provides you with hints,
examples and instructions.
help
This command restarts the voice session
from the initial starting point.
(main menu | start again)
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit.
Helpful Hints
•Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
•Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.
•Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
•You can interrupt the system at any
time while it is speaking by pressing the
voice button. You can cancel a voice
session by pressing and holding the
voice button.
340
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less
instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
voice settings
Then either of the following:
Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)
interaction mode novice
Provides less audible interaction and guid-
ance.
interaction mode advanced
Confirmation Prompts
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there is more than one
possible response to your request.
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
voice settings
Then either of the following:
Make a best guess from the command; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
confirmation prompts off
Clarify your voice command with a short
question.
confirmation prompts on
Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
341
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
voice settings
Then any of the following:
When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.
phone confirmation on
The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
phone confirmation off
Changing the Voice Settings
In addition to using voice commands to
change the voice settings, you can also use
the menu in the audio display.
To change the voice settings press the
Menu button then select:
Menu Item
SYNC-Settings
Voice settings
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
•Answering an incoming call.
•Ending a call.
•Using privacy mode.
•Dialing a number.
•Redialing.
•Call waiting notification.
•Caller ID.
342
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone's compatibility, see
your phone's manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
calls.
Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 4000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.
Using the Audio System
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button. When the
audio display indicates there is no
paired phone, select the option to add.
3. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your phone to start the pairing
process.
4. When prompted on your cell phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Your phone is now
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
Using Voice Commands
E142599
Make sure to switch on your
phone's Bluetooth feature
before starting the search. See
your device's manual if necessary.
Press the voice and when prompted
say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
Follow the instruc-
tions on the audio
display.
(pair ([Bluetooth]
device | phone |
Bluetooth audio) |
add phone)
You can say any of the voice commands
that appear within open and close brackets
that are separated by |. For example,
where; (what's | what is) appears you say;
what's or what is.
The commands that have [ ] around the
word means that the word is optional.
343
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1. Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button.
3. Select the option for Bluetooth
Devices.
4. Press the OK button.
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
6. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device.
7. When prompted on your cell phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Your phone is now
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell
phone options. Your cell phone may also
prompt you to give SYNC permission to
access information. For more information
on your cell phone’s capability, see your
cell phone’s manual and visit the website.
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say any of the
following:
Voice Command
(phone | Blackberry | iPhone)
Then say any of the following:
call (___)
call ___ at home
call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work)
call ___ on (cell | mobile)
call ___ on other
1
dial [[a] number]
2
([go to] privacy | transfer to phone
| privacy on)
2
(hold call [on] | place call on hold)
2
join (calls | call)
2
mute call [on]
2
(mute call off | un-mute call)
(turn ringer on | silent mode off)
(turn ringer off | silent mode [on])
344
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Command
3
[text] (messages | message)
help
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Home".
1 See Dial table below.
2 These commands are only valid while in
a phone call.
3 See the text message table below.
Dial Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted
say any of the following commands:
Voice Commands
411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one)
700 (seven hundred)
800 (eight hundred)
900 (nine hundred)
Clear (deletes all entered digits)
Delete (deletes last set of digits entered)
Number <0-9>
Plus
Pound (#)
Star (*)
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the
phone button or press any button on the
audio system.
To access text messages say:
Voice Command
[text] (messages | message)
Then say any of the following:
(listen to | read) ([text] message)
forward (text | [text] message)
reply to (text | [text] message)
call [sender]
Phonebook Hints
To hear how the SYNC system speaks a
name browse phonebook, select a contact
and press:
Menu Item
Hear it
Changing Devices Using Voice
Commands
Using SYNC, you can easily access multiple
phones, ipods, or USB devices. to switch
devices say:
345
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Command
You can state the name of
the desired device, such as
“My iPhone”,“My Galaxy”
or“My iPod”. SYNC may
ask you to confirm the type
of device (Phone, USB, or
Bluetooth Audio).
(connect |
device) ___
Making Calls
E142599
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
Voice Command
call [[a] name]
SYNC prompts you to say
the numbers that you wish
to dial. After you say the
numbers, the system
confirms it. You can then
say:
dial [[a]
number]
When the system has stated the
number, you say any of the following:
Voice Command
This initiates the call.(dial | send)
This erases the spoken
digits.
(delete |
correct)
To end the call, press the end call button
on the steering wheel or select the end call
option in the audio display.
Receiving Calls
Accepting calls
When receiving a call, you can answer the
call by pressing the accept call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.
To use the screen to accept a call
select:
Menu Item
Accept
Rejecting Calls
When receiving a call, you can reject the
call by pressing the reject call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.
To use the screen to reject a call select:
Menu Item
Reject
Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active
Call
During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, such as
putting a call on hold or joining calls.
To access this menu, choose one of the
options available at the bottom of the
audio display or select More to choose
from the following options:
346
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and actionMenu Item
Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch the
microphone on, select the option again.
Mic. off
Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to
your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When
selected, the audio display indicates the call is private.
Privacy
Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
indicates the call is on hold.
Hold
Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad
(for example, numbers for passwords).
Dial a number
Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum
of three callers on a multiparty or conference call.
Join calls
1. Select the More option.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the More option.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.
Access your phonebook contacts.Phonebook
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Access your call history log.Call History
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Accessing Features through the
Phone Menu
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the
phone menu.
2. Select one of the options available.
347
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and actionDisplay
Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad.Dial a number
Access your downloaded phonebook.Phonebook
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to access an
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters
on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.Call History
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press
the OK button to make your selection.
3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the
numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad.
Speed Dial
Send, download and delete text messages.Text messaging
Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on or off, delete).
BT Devices
View various settings and features on your phone.Phone settings
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
Your phone must support downloading text
messages using Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature
and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
When a new message arrives, an audible
tone sounds and the audio display
indicates you have a new message.
To hear the message you can say:
Description and
action
Voice command
Select this option
to have the system
read the message
to you.
(listen to | read)
([text] message)
348
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Using the screen you also have the following options:
Description and actionMenu
Item
Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message
inbox.
Ignore
Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have
the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For
additional options select:
View
If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the
following options:
More...
Press the OK button to access, and then scroll
through a list of pre-defined messages to send.
Reply to
sender
Press the OK button to call the sender of the
message.
Call sender
Press the OK button to forward the message to
anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can
also choose to enter a number.
Forward
msg.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Select the text messaging option, and
then press the OK button.
Choose from the following options:
Description and actionMenu
Item
Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15
messages.
New
Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option to
have the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, select
the More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or
forward the message.
View
Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellular
phone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all your
text messages.
Delete
Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of all
unread messages from your cellular phone.
More...
349
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Sending a Text Message
Note: You can only send a text message to
one recipient at a time.
1. Select the send option when the
desired selection highlights in the audio
display.
2. Select the confirmation option when
the contact appears.
3. Press the OK button again to confirm
when the system asks if you want to
send the message. A pre-defined
signature appears on each text
message.
Note: You can send text messages either
by choosing a contact from the phonebook
and selecting the text option from the audio
display or by replying to a received message
in the inbox.
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your
phone settings allow you to access and
adjust features such as your ring tone and
text message notification, modify your
phonebook, and set up automatic
download.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until the phone settings option
appears, and then press the OK button.
Scroll to select from the following options:
Description and actionMenu Item
If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone
as the master when there is more than one cellular phone
paired to the system. This option can be changed for all
cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the
Bluetooth Devices menu.
Set as master
See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular
phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left
arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu.
Phone status
Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your
phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone
sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone
option.
Set ringtone
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone.
Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you
when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to
switch the audible tone off or on.
Text msg notify
Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,
delete or download). Press the OK button to select and
scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences
table below.
Phonebook pref.
350
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phonebook preferencesMenu Item
Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.
Add contacts
When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the
current phonebook and call history. The system takes you
back to the menu for phone settings.
Delete
Press the OK button to select and download your phone-
book to the system.
Download now
When automatic download is on, the system deletes any
changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since
your last download.
Auto-download
When automatic download is off, the system does not
download your phonebook when your cellular phone
connects to SYNC.
You can only access your phonebook, call history and text
messages when your paired cellular phone connects to
the system. Check or uncheck this option to download
your phonebook automatically each time your phone
connects to the system. Download times are phone-
dependent and quantity-dependent.
Enabling this feature allows you to select how your
contacts are displayed. You can select:
Sorting Pref.
Last/First nameFirst/Last name
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices as well
as set a phone as primary.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears,
and then press the OK button.
Select from the following options:
Description and actionMenu Item
Pair additional phones to the system.Add
1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.
351
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and actionMenu Item
2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio
display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's
manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm
that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Skip the next step. If you are prompted
to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the
screen. The display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears,
select either yes or no.
5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options.
Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC
permission to access information. For more information
on your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’s
manual and visit the website.
Select the delete option and confirm when the system
asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone
from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair
it again.
Delete
The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular
phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you
select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the
list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone
as master by selecting the master option and confirming
it as the primary.
Master
Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have
one phone connected at a time to use the phone's func-
tionality. When you connect another phone, the previous
phone disconnects from the telephone services. The
system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for
the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio
music playback feature at the same time.
Conn.
Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option
and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone,
you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing
process.
Discon.
System Settings
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, and
then press the OK button.
352
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Scroll to select from the following options:
Description and actionDisplay
Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's
Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then
press the OK button to change the option's status.
Bluetooth on
Return to the factory default settings without erasing your
indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices). Select this option and
confirm when prompted in the audio display.
Set defaults
Completely erase all information stored in the system
(such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired
devices) and return to factory default settings.
Master reset
Install downloaded applications or software updates.
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation
successfully.
Install on SYNC
Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number. Press the OK button to select.
System info
The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page 340).
Voice settings
Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up and down
arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use
the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder.
You can select media content for playback from this menu.
Browse USB
353
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES (If Equipped)
In order for the following features to work,
your cellular phone must be compatible
with SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
•911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
•SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect
to and use certain applications such as
Spotify and Glympse (if your phone is
compatible).
These features may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
911 Assist
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the system
will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist
to make an emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone
in a secure location in your vehicle so it
does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or damage
the phone which could prevent 911 Assist
from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on
or off, that setting applies for all paired
phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either
a voice message plays or a display message
or an icon comes on when your vehicle is
started and after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 39). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 219).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
354
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Setting 911 Assist On or Off
Press Menu then select
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
SYNC-Applications
Select the desired option, on
or off.
911 Assist
If you choose not to activate this
feature you will have the following
options:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
Provides a display and voice
reminder at phone connection
at vehicle start.
Voice
Reminder
ON
Provides a display reminder
only without a voice reminder
at phone connection.
Voice
Reminder
OFF
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
•SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
•The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
•You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
•The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911
Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains
damage or loses its connection to SYNC
during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries
to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC then attempts to call the
emergency services.
Before making the call:
•SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
•SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel".
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
•Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
•The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
•The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
355
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.
SYNC Mobile Apps
The system enables voice and steering
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled
smartphone apps. When an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website.
Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps
will vary by region.
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps work automatically with no
setup. Other apps want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
Note: AppLink is not available if your
vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch
system.
To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the
menu on-screen. Then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu
Item
SYNC-Apps
Scroll through the list of
available applications and
select a particular app or
select:
Mobile
Apps
Find New Apps
Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC
AppLink app, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
Accessing an App's Menu
When an app is running through SYNC,
press the right arrow button on the steering
wheel control to access the app menu.
You can access various app features from
here, for example thumbs up and thumbs
down.
Press the left arrow button on the steering
wheel control to exit the app menu.
356
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button then when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you
can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".
mobile (apps |
applications)
Use this command to discover the available voice commands.help
SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands
The following voice commands are always available:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
SYNC prompts you to say the name of an
app to start it on SYNC.
mobile (apps | applications)
SYNC lists all of the currently available
mobile apps.
list [mobile] (apps | applications)
Searches your connected mobile device for
SYNC-compatible mobile apps.
find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications)
help
You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC.
App Permissions
App permissions are organized by groups.
You can grant these group permissions
individually. You can change a permission
group status any time when not driving, by
using the settings menu.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example:
•To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
information to the app such as, but not
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
•To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.
357
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
•To allow your vehicle to provide
location information, including: GPS
and speed.
•To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Push notifications
may be particularly useful for news or
location based apps.
Note: You only need to grant permissions
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps
You can also select a specific app.
If the app supports push notifications, this
setting is listed. Select to enable or disable
the feature as required.
All Apps
Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
Data is sent to Ford in the United States
through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place
automatically.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
App Status
You can view the current status of an app
in the settings menu.
358
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
There are three possible statuses:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The system has detected a new app
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is required.
Update Needed
No update is required.Up-To-Date
The system is trying to receive an update.Updating...
Update settings
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select this option from the settings menu
to manually preform a needed update.
Request Update
Select this option from the settings menu
to disable automatic updates.
Disable Updates
Doing so also disables the use of Mobile
Apps on SYNC.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
digital music player over your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, such as artist and album.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 15,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod, Zune,
plays from device players, and most USB
drives. SYNC also supports audio formats,
such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Confirm that the USB device has been
formatted correctly and has the following
specifications:
•USB 2.0.
•File format must be FAT16/32.
The format of the audio files on the USB
device must be:
•MP3.
•Non DRM protected WMA.
•WAV.
•AAC.
Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.
359
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To Connect Using Voice Commands
Plug the device into one of the vehicle's
USB ports.
Press the voice button and when
prompted, say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
You can now play
music by saying any
of the appropriate
voice commands.
See the media
voice commands.
(USB [stick] | iPod
| MP3 [player])
Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do
not have to be spoken for the system to
understand the command. For example,
for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3
[player]) appears, you can say USB or USB
stick.
To Connect Using the System Menu
1. Plug the device into one of the vehicle's
USB ports.
2. Press the MEDIA button and select
either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media
source list in the audio display.
To view USB content select:
Description and ActionMessage
Depending on how many media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When
indexing is complete, the selected source starts to playback
audio automatically.
Browse USB
You can browse the files on the USB
device in categories. Select BROWSE
from the buttons at the bottom of the
audio display and choose from the
following:
Message
Play all
Playlists
Songs
Artists
Message
Albums
Genres
Browse USB
Reset USB
Media Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
360
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and ActionVoice Command
You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
voice commands.
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3
[player])
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or
"what is playing".
Description and ActionCommand
Pauses device playback.pause
Resumes device playback.play
play [album] ___
Play all media on the device from the first
track to the last.
play all
play [artist] ___
play [genre] ___
play [playlist] ___
Plays the next track on the current media.next [track | title | song | file | podcast |
chapter | episode]
Plays the previous track on current media.previous [track | title | song | file |
podcast | chapter | episode]
Creates a playlist with a similar genre to the
one currently playing.
[play] (similar music | more like this)
play [song | track | title | file] ___
repeat off
Repeats the current track.repeat (one | track) [on]
361
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and ActionCommand
Plays the current playlist in a random order.
(Not all devices support this command.)
shuffle [all] [on]
shuffle off
At any time during playback, you can press
the voice button and ask the system what is
playing. The system reads the metadata tags
(if populated) of the current track.
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles".
Examples of USB Commands
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive
ways to find and play a song using voice.
For example, if we have a song called
"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical
Mystery Tour" we can say the following to
play this song:
•Play song "Penny Lane".
•Play "Penny Lane".
If we wanted to play the entire album, we
can say:
•Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".
•Play "Magical Mystery Tour".
Bluetooth Audio
The system is also capable of playing
music from your cellular phone through
Bluetooth.
To switch the Bluetooth Audio on, press
the MEDIA button and select:
Menu Item
BT audio
Then any of the following:
Voice Command
pause
play
next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select how
to play your music (such as by artist, genre,
shuffle or repeat), find similar music or
reset the index of your USB devices.
Press the MEDIA button and select either
USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list
in the audio display to start USB playback.
362
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and ActionMessage
This will enter the media menu.Options
Then any of the following:
Description and ActionMessage
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Shuffle
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Repeat track
You can play similar types of music to the current playlist
from the USB port. The system uses the metadata informa-
tion of each track to compile a playlist. The system then
creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.
Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this
feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags
Similar music
are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice
recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you
place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage
device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play
menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
Reset USB
Accessing Your USB Song Library
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the
audio display) to select USB playback.
Description and ActionMessage
This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist or track.
Browse USB
If there are no media files to access, the
display indicates there is no media.
363
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
If there are media files, you have the following options:
Description and ActionDisplay
Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time
in numerical order.*
Play all
Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears
in the display.
Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,
or MTP).*
Playlists
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the
OK button.
Search for and play a specific indexed track.*
Songs
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK
button.
Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists
and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.*
Artists
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK
button.
Sort all indexed media files by album.*
Albums
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the
OK button.
Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.*
Genres
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the
OK button.
Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not
visible.)
Browse USB
1. Press the OK button to select.
364
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Description and ActionDisplay
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and
then press the OK button.
Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
Reset USB
*You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric
keypad to jump in the list.
Using Voice Commands
You can access and view your USB songs
using voice commands.
Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
Press the voice button and when
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
Accessing and Viewing USB Media
(browse | search | show) all (album |
albums)
(browse | search | show) all (artist |
artists)
(browse | search | show) all (genre |
genres)
(browse | search | show) all (playlist |
playlists)
(browse | search | show) all (song | songs
| title | titles | file | files | track | tracks)
(browse | search | show) album ___
(browse | search | show) artist ___
(browse | search | show) genre ___
(browse | search | show) playlist ___
USB 2 (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may come equipped with an
additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located
at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of
the instrument panel. USB 2 is located
inside the storage compartment of the
vehicle's center console.
You can plug in an additional USB device
into the second USB port.
You can access both USB devices by using
voice commands.
To access a USB device press the voice
button and when prompted say:
Voice command
USB 1
USB 2
Note: SYNC only supports one connected
iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever
one you plug in first). When you connect a
second iOS device, the systems charges it,
but does not support playback from it.
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings
You can access these menus using the
audio display. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 342).
365
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Commands for Audio
Sources
Your voice system allows you to change
audio sources with a simple voice
command.
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice Command
(music | audio | entertainment) [system]
Below are a few examples of voice
commands you can use.
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] AM 2
Bluetooth (audio | stereo)
(disc | CD [player]) play
[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] FM1
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] FM 2
Radio
*
tune [to] SAT
*
Sirius
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])
Voice Command
((who's | who is) this | who plays this |
(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what
| which) (song | track | artist) is this |
(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what
is) this)
help
* If equipped.
Radio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to the radio,
press the voice button, and then
say any of the commands in the
following table.
If you are not listening to the radio,
press the voice button and, after the
tone, say:
Voice Command
Radio
You can then say any of the following
commands.
[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)
[tune [to]] AM 2
[tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])
[tune [to]] AM preset ___
[tune [to]] AM1 preset ___
[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] FM1
[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset) preset ___
366
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Command
[tune [to]] FM 2
[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM])
[tune [to]] FM preset ___
*
FM ___ HD ___
[tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___
*
HD ___
[tune [to]] preset ___
Tune
help
* If equipped.
Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands
(If equipped)
E142599
To listen to Sirius satellite radio,
press the voice button and, after
the tone, say:
Voice Commands
Sirius
When you are listening to Sirius
satellite radio, you can press the voice
button, and say any of the commands
in the following table.
Voice Commands
tune [to] SAT
[tune [to]] SAT 1
[tune [to]] SAT 2
[tune [to]] SAT 3
[tune [to]] preset ___
[tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___
Voice Commands
[tune [to]] SAT 2 preset ___
[tune [to]] SAT 3 preset ___
tune [to] [Sirius]
Help
You can say the
channel number (0-
233) to listen to that
Sirius station.
[tune [to]] Sirius
[channel] ___
CD Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button, and then say
any of the commands in the
following table.
If you are not listening to a CD, press
the voice button and, after the tone,
say:
Voice Command
(disc | CD [player]) play
You can then say any of the following
commands.
pause
play
[play] next track
[play] previous track
[play | change to] track [number] ___
repeat (track | song) [on]
repeat folder [on]
repeat off
(shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks |
songs) [on]]
367
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Command
(shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] |
disc) [on]
(shuffle | random | mix) folder [on]
shuffle off
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction. Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says Phonebook
Downloaded but the
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts.
368
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
369
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC. Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
370
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
The device is not connected.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device. The file may be corrupted.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying. After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
371
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it. Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.
Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
372
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Ensure you have a compat-
ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is
An AppLink capable phone
is not connected to SYNC.
AppLink Mobile Applica-
tions: When I select "Find
New Apps," SYNC does not
find any applications.
paired and connected to
SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
AppLink-enabled apps are
not installed and running on
your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but
I still cannot find any apps.
require you to register or
373
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
Sometime apps do not
properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
over ignition cycles, for
example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
finding the particular app
and choosing 'Force stop.'
Don't forget to restart the
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth bug on
some older versions of the
Android operating system
that may cause apps that
were found on your previous
vehicle drive to not be found
again if you have not turned
off Bluetooth.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
374
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset.
My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
available Bluetooth ports,
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.
SYNC System Reset
The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.
375
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Getting to Know Your System
The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
with a variety of features using the
touchscreen and voice commands. By
integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled
phone, the touchscreen provides easy
interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
3 compatible apps.
Using the Touchscreen
To operate the touchscreen, you can
simply touch the item or option that you
want to select. The button changes color
when you select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.
E205444
376
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current
system activities including climate settings, voice
commands and phone functions such as text messages.
Status BarA
This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it
takes you to the home screen view.
HomeB
This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually
or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See
Settings (page 423).
ClockC
This displays the current outside temperature.Outside
Temperature
D
You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a
feature.
Feature BarE
The touchscreen allows you quick access
to all of your comfort, navigation,
communication and entertainment
options. Using the status and feature bar
you can quickly select the feature you want
to use.
Note: Your system is equipped with a
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 10 minutes after
you switch the ignition off (and no doors
open).
The Status Bar
Additional icons also display in the status
bar depending on market, vehicle options
and current operation. If a feature is not
active, the icon does not display. Certain
icons may move to the left or right
depending on what options are active.
377
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E249671
i
DescriptionItemCallout
This shows the temperature the driver selects through
the climate control system.
Driver Temper-
ature
A
When you activate the heated steering wheel option
on the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displays
when there is not a physical button for the heated
steering wheel.
Heated steering
wheel
B
(If equipped)
When the passenger's temperature has been
adjusted and is no longer linked to the driver's
temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and
the temperatures are linked, the passenger's
temperature does not display.
Passenger
Temperature
C
This icon displays when your phone's microphone is
muted. A caller cannot hear you.
Microphone MuteD
This icon displays when the audio system is muted.MuteE
378
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionItemCallout
This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software
update. Pressing the icon shows more details about
the new software.
DownloadF
This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.Wi-FiG
An available Wi-Fi network is within range.Wi-Fi in RangeH
This icon displays the phone signal strength and the
roaming signal strength.
Signal StrengthI
This icon displays when you receive a text message
on your phone.
Text MessageJ
This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and
your phone is connected to SYNC.
911 Assist OffK
This icon displays when a phone call is active.In-CallL
This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth
connection.
BluetoothM
Messages may also appear in the status
bar to provide you with notifications. You
can select the message to view the
associated feature.
Feature Bar
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Allows you to control the media playing in
your vehicle. You can control all audio
features including AM, FM and satellite
radio, CDs, and media streaming over a
Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.
Audio
Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan
speed and airflow within the vehicle.
Climate
Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and
access the phonebook of your connected
device.
Phone
379
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Allows you to see your vehicle's location on
a virtual road map, get driving directions to
your destination and find points of interest
along your route.
Navigation
(If equipped)
Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible
apps running on your iphone or android
device. Also, access built-in additional
features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel
Link (if equipped).
Apps
If your vehicle is a hybrid, plug-in hybrid, or
electric this is also where your settings and
power information is located.
You can customize your system with
various settings for the touchscreen display,
feature preferences, and how you want to
interact with your vehicle.
Settings
Cleaning the Touchscreen
You can remove fingerprints with a dry,
clean, soft cloth.
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the
cloth and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.
Using Voice Recognition
Using voice commands allows you to keep
your hands on the wheel and focus on
what is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the status bar
indicating the status of the voice command
session. See Using Voice Recognition
(page 390).
Accessing and Adjusting Modes
Through Your Vehicle Information
Display (If Equipped)
Depending on your vehicle and selected
options you may be able to control some
of the SYNC 3 features on your information
display. The features are visible the right
hand display (A).
380
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E208626
You can make the following adjustments
using the information display SYNC 3
screen:
InformationOption
Information for current audio playing.Entertain-
ment Select source.
View current road and speed limit (if information is available).Naviga-
tion View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on cluster
level), distance to destination (depending on cluster level), and ability to
cancel route.
If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass is
shown.
If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting:1
Phone
381
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
InformationOption
Missed callsOutgoing callsIncoming callsAll calls
If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display.
If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-hand
steering wheel controls.
1 Depending on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display.
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll
through the available modes.
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
•Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
•Press the right arrow to enter the mode,
use the left arrow to exit the mode.
•Press the up and down arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
•Press OK to confirm your selection.
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
navigation, compass appears in the display
instead of navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the compass menu, you can
see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle
is traveling, not true direction (for example,
if the vehicle is traveling west, the middle
of the compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).
Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use different controls on
your steering wheel to interact with the
touchscreen system in different ways.
VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
Mute: Mute the audio output.
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press
again to stop the voice prompt and
immediately begin speaking. Press and
hold to end a voice session.
SEEK NEXT:
•While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
•While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
SEEK PREVIOUS:
•While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
•While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call
or switch between calls.
PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or
reject an incoming call.
Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may
be combined with PHONE REJECT and
SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with
PHONE ACCEPT.
M: Touch the control repeatedly to switch
between media sources (modes).
See Steering Wheel (page 71).
Using Your Bezel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your instrument panel:
382
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
•Power: Switch the audio system on
and off.
•VOL: Control the volume of playing
audio.
•Seek and Tune: Use as you normally
would in audio modes.
•Eject: Eject a CD from the audio
system.
•SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly
to advance through available media
modes.
•SOUND: Press to access the Sound
menu where you can adjust sound and
other audio settings.
•1-6: Press and hold to store or press to
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory
preset. See Audio System (page 321).
•DISP: Switch the display on or off. You
can also touch the screen to switch the
display back on.
•Temperature, fan and climate
control buttons: Control the
temperature, fan speed or settings of
the climate control system. See
Climate Control (page 108).
911 Assist
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the system
will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist
to make an emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone
in a secure location in your vehicle so it
does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or damage
the phone which could prevent 911 Assist
from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, by visiting:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
383
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Website
www.syncmaroute.ca
For important information about airbag
deployment and the fuel pump shut-off
please see the Supplementary Restrains
and Roadside Emergencies sections of
your owner manual.
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view
the settings information. See Settings
(page 423).
To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
•SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
•The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
•You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
•The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.
Before making the call:
•SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
•SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
•Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
•The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
•The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.
384
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
•Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
check your vehicle.
•Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
•Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
•For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling
at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make
sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC 3.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
•Screens crowded with information,
such as Point of Interest reviews and
ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
sports scores, movie times or ski
conditions.
•Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
•All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts
or recent phone call entries).
See the following table for more specific
examples.
Restricted features
Pairing a Bluetooth phone.Cellular Phone
Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and
recent phone calls.
Editing the keypad code.System Functionality
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active.
385
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Restricted features
Editing Wi-Fi settings.Wi-Fi
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.
Viewing received text messages.Text Messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destination.Navigation
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid
Areas.
Creating a SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•Essential for keeping up with the latest
software and connected features.
•Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
•Maintain account permissions.
Visit the website to sign up and register.
Website
www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Updating Your System
You can choose to download the update
onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver
automatic updates.
USB Updates
To use the USB update you need to log
into your owner account and visit the SYNC
software update page.
Website
www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
Website
www.syncmaroute.ca
The website notifies you if an update is
available. You can then select to download
the update.
You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum
requirements. Once you have inserted the
USB drive into your computer, choose to
start the download. Follow the instructions
provided to download the files to the USB
drive.
The installation of most files occurs in the
background, and does not interrupt your
use of the system. Navigation updates
cannot be installed in the background,
because the files are too large.
To install the update in your vehicle,
remove anything that is plugged in the USB
ports on the media hub and plug in the
USB drive containing the update. When
the USB drive is plugged in, the installation
should begin immediately. After a
successful installation, the update is
available the next time the vehicle is
started.
Please reference the website for any
further actions.
386
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Updating Over Wi-Fi
To update your System over Wi-Fi your
vehicle must be connected to a Wi-Fi
access point. Data rates may apply.
To connect your system to Wi-Fi,
select:
Menu Item
Settings
Wi-Fi
You can then select your
Wi-Fi network. You may
have to enter the security
code if the network is
secured. The system
confirms when it has
connected to the network.
Available
Wi-Fi
Networks
You must also give the system permission
to update automatically. Upon vehicle
delivery, the System asks you if you would
like to use the automatic update feature.
If you agree to automatic updates, you can
press OK to confirm. If this selection does
not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
access it through the General Settings. See
Settings (page 423). You can also perform
a master reset. See SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting (page 437).
If you would like to switch this feature
on later, select:
Menu Item
Settings
General
From this menu, you can
enable automatic updates.
If you have not done so
already, the system
prompts you to set up a
Wi-Fi connection when you
enable this feature.
Automatic
System
Updates
When the system is connected via Wi-Fi
and automatic updates are enabled, your
system checks for software updates
periodically. If a new version is available, it
downloads at that time. Software
downloads can take place for up to 30
minutes after you have switched your
vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt
the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If
a download does not complete for any
reason, the download continues where it
left off at the next Wi-Fi connected
opportunity. Upon activation of an update,
a banner displays on the touchscreen
indicating the system update. Select the
icon to see more detail. This icon displays
for two ignition cycles.
To switch this feature off:
Menu Item
Settings
General
In this menu selection, you
can change the selection
for automatic updates to
OFF.
Automatic
System
Updates
387
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you are not
able to answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
United States: 1-800-392-3673.
Canada: 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to
SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that links to that cellular
phone. This profile helps in offering you
more cellular features and operating more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile
may contain data about your cellular
phone book, text messages (read and
unread), and call history, including history
of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you
connect a media device, the system
creates and retains an index of supported
media content. The system also records a
short diagnostic log of approximately 10
minutes of all recent system activity. The
log profile and other system data may be
used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when the
cellular phone or media player is
connected.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you perform
a Master Reset to erase all stored
information. You can find more information
about the Master Reset in General
Settings. See Settings (page 423). System
data cannot be accessed without special
equipment and access to your vehicle's
SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada and The Lincoln Motor
Company do not access the system data
for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where
required by law enforcement, other
government authorities, or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada and The Lincoln Motor
Company.
HOME SCREEN
388
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E207616
Home screen displayTileItem
Shows the active media source.AudioA
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the
compass.
The name of the connected phone appears on the screen. The
status of the phone features also appear. This includes signal
strength, battery charge, 911 assist setting state (On or Off),
text messaging and roaming.
PhoneB
This map displays your current location or current route in real
time.
*
NavigationC
When you have navigation active, you also see the next turn
and the length of time and distance to your destination.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the
audio information.
* If equipped.
389
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
You can touch any of the feature displays
to access that feature.
Anytime you select the home button, the
system returns you to this screen.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio
and climate controls. By using voice
commands, you can keep your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
E142599
To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice
button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context
and the description of the command tell
you what to say for this dynamic option.
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Brings you to the main menu.Main Menu
Returns you to the previous screen.Go back
Ends the voice session.Cancel
Gives you a list of possible voice commands.List of Commands
You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
___ List of Commands
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Next Page
You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Previous Page
Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.
Help
Included here are some of the most
popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature.
Audio Voice Commands
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.
390
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
You can say the Sirius channel name or number
such as "Sirius channel 16".
1
Sirius Channel ___
You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM
frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580".
AM ___
FM ___
Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency
such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.
1
FM ___ HD ___
Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth
connected device.
Bluetooth Audio
Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.
USB
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
selection. Your system must finish indexing
before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Penny Lane".
Play Genre ___
Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selec-
tion. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".
Browse ___
1 This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
Climate Voice Commands
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
setting.
391
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To adjust the temperature, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F
(15.5–29.5°C).
Set Temperature ___
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth enabled phone to the
system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing
process. See Settings (page 423).
Pair Phone
Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".
Call ___
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".
Call ___ at ___
Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.Dial ___
Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
392
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
DescriptionVoice Command
If you did not enter the full number with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.
<0-9>
Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.Dial
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits you state.Delete
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.Clear
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
DescriptionVoice command
Listen to Message
You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.
Listen to text message ___
Reply to Message
Navigation Voice Commands (If
Equipped)
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a
point of interest.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or a major brand name, where
major brand name is a chain with more
than 20 locations
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can
also search for an address in a specific state or province.
Find an Address
State the name of the POI category or major brand name you
would like to search for such as "Find restaurants".
Find a ___
Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.Find a POI
393
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.Find an Intersection
State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would
like to search for.
Find the Nearest
<POI Category>
Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.Show Previous
Destinations
Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.Show Favorites
Allows you to route to your home address.Drive Home
Allows you to route to your work address.Drive to Work
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
DescriptionVoice command
Cancels the current route.Cancel Route
Allows you to select an alternate route.Detour
Repeats the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction
Displays the active route.Show Route
Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.Route Summary
Provides current location.Where Am I
Allows you to zoom in on the map.Zoom in
Allows you to zoom out from the map.Zoom out
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
DescriptionVoice command
SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.
Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.List Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.
Find Mobile Apps
394
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
DescriptionVoice command
At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an
app
SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an
app, followed by
help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
Voice Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not
be available in all markets. Activation and
a subscription are required.
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
DescriptionVoice command
Displays a list of traffic incidents.Show Traffic
Displays the current weather map.Show Weather Map
Displays a list of fuel prices.Show Fuel Prices
Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5 Day Fore-
cast
Help
Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.Voice Settings
Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.Interaction Mode
Standard
Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.Interaction Mode
Advanced
Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.Call Confirmation On
395
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
The system does not confirm before placing a call.Call Confirmation Off
The system displays a short list of available commands.Voice Command Lists On
The system does not display the list of commands.Voice Command Lists Off
You can use the volume control to adjust
the volume of the system voice prompts.
While prompt is active, adjust the volume
control up or down to your desired setting.
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. You
can adjust the fan speed during a voice
session, simply press the fan buttons (or
turn the fan knob) to increase or decrease
the fan speed to the setting you prefer.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
ENTERTAINMENT
396
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E207617
Message and descriptionMessage
SourcesA
Direct TuneB
PresetsC
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Sources
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
Menu item
AM
FM
*SIRIUS
CD
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB
397
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu item
Bluetooth Stereo
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.
Apps
* This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the
touchscreen, select:
Menu item
Direct Tune
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
Once you have entered the station's
call numbers, you can select:
Action and descrip-
tion
Menu item
Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.
Enter
Press to exit
without changing
the station.
Cancel
Presets
To set a new preset, tune to the station
and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.
There are two preset banks available for
AM and three banks for FM. To access
additional presets, tap the preset button.
The indicator on the preset button shows
which bank of presets you are currently
viewing.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.
398
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E234451
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Direct Tune
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
The system tunes to the station you select.Enter
You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.
Cancel
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.
399
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and descriptionMenu item
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-
imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
Replay
When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.
Live
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
ALERT
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See
Settings (page 423).
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.
There are three preset banks available for
SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap
the preset button. The indicator on the
preset button shows which bank of presets
you are currently viewing.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
Settings (page 423).
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-
ence and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
400
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.
Acquiring Signal
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
There is an internal module or
system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer avail-
able.
Invalid Channel
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the Siri-
usXM satellite or SiriusXM
tower to your vehicle antenna.
Satellite acquiring
signal…
No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.
Update of channel program-
ming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve subscrip-
tion issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call 1-
888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to turn
off the Lock or Skip function on
that station.
All the channels in the selected
category are either skipped or
locked.
None found. Check
channel guide.
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
SIRIUS Subscription
updated
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets.
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 423).
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
401
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit:
Website
www.hdradio.com
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
Note: There is also an additional feature
for stations that have more than 1 HD
multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
Pressing this button allows you to cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and descriptionMessage
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Presets
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
402
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment by
the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The recep-
tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until the
audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is available.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
403
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. The station
is not available in your current
location.
The previously stored multicast
preset or direct tune is not
available in your current recep-
tion area.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form.
*
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form.
*
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from DTS Inc. U.S. and foreign
patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of
DTS Inc. Ford Motor Company and DTS
Inc. are not responsible for the content sent
using HD Radio technology. Content may
be changed, added or deleted at any time
at the station owner's discretion.
* You can find the form here:
Website
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
CD
Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:
FunctionButton
You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.
Repeat
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
404
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Bluetooth Stereo or USB
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
FunctionButton
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).
Repeat
Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the
currently playing track, press the cover art
or Info button.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
buttons allow you to skip forward or
backward within a track.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
FunctionButton
If available, displays the list of tracks in the
Now Playing playlist.
Browse
This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
New Search
Play All
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
405
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionButton
Composers
This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
A-Z Jump
If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Explore Device
USB Ports
E211463
The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the
instrument panel.
This feature allows you to plug in USB
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.
Apps
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as Pandora or iHeartRadio
through a USB or Bluetooth enabled
device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 420).
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
iPhone, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
media files, provide information about the
file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
devices.
406
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
PHONE
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of the system. Once you pair your
cell phone, you can access many options
using the touchscreen or voice commands.
While the system supports a variety of
features, many are dependent on your cell
phone’s functionality.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
•Answering an incoming call.
•Ending a call.
•Dialing a number.
•Call waiting notification.
•Caller identification.
407
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:
Websites
owner.ford.com
Websites
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Phone Menu
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.
E251249
G
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
Displays your recent calls.Recent
Call List
A
You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
408
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down
menu at the top of the screen. You can choose:
MissedOutgoingIncomingAll
All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabet-
ical order.
ContactsB
Selecting this button allows
you to choose a specific letter
to view.
A-Z Jump
Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the
phone settings options.
Phone
Settings
C
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring
tones and alerts.
Gives you access to the list of paired or connected
Bluetooth devices allowing you to change or select a
device.
Change
Device
D
Displays all recent text messages.Text
Messages
E
Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.Phone
Keypad
F
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Press this button to begin a
call.
Call
Touch this button to reject all incoming calls automatic-
ally. Text message notifications do not display on the
screen. All ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
Do Not
Disturb
G
Users with phones having voice services
may see a button to access the feature.
For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.
A press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from
the SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice
Recognition (page 390). You can use the
touchscreen to place calls as well.
409
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To call a number in your contacts,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select the
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers
stored for that contact
display along with any
stored contact photos. You
can then select the
number that you want to
call. The system begins the
call.
Contacts
To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select an
entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call.
Recent Call
List
To call a number that is not stored in
your phone, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.
Phone
Keypad
The system begins the call.Call
Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Menu Item
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item
Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3
logs it as a missed call.
During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name
and number display on the screen along
with the call duration.
The phone status items are also visible:
•Signal Strength.
•Battery.
•911 Assist (United States and Canada
only). See Settings (page 423).
You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:
410
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Item
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press the
button on the
steering wheel.
End Call
Press this to access
the phone keypad.
Keypad
You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.
Mute
Item
Privacy Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
back to SYNC 3.
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.Hear It
View the text on the touchscreen.View
To call the sender.Call
You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message
that you would like to use and confirm to send the message.
SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
Reply
To exit the screen.Close
Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)
SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay
and Android Auto to access your phone.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android
Auto, you can:
•Make calls.
•Send and receive messages.
•Listen to music.
•Use your phone's voice assistant.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable
some SYNC 3 features.
Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
features use mobile data.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or
newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to
the latest iOS version is recommended.
1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See
Entertainment (page 396).
411
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
2. Follow the prompts on the
touchscreen.
3. Follow the prompts that appear on
your phone to allow access to Apple
CarPlay.
After completing the setup, your phone
connects to CarPlay automatically when
plugged into a USB port.
To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:
Menu Item
Apple CarPlay Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your
device and select:
Disable
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple
CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC
app.
Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay
support.
Android Auto
Android Auto is compatible with most
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.
1. Download the Android Auto app to
your device from Google Play to
prepare your device (this may require
mobile data usage).
Note: The Android Auto App may not be
available within your current market.
2. Plug your device into a USB port. See
Entertainment (page 396).
3. To switch this feature on from the
Settings screen, scroll left on the
screen and select:
Menu Item
Android Auto Preferences
Enable Android Auto
Note: Android Auto must be switched on
after plugging in your device.
To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:
Menu Item
Android Auto Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and select:
Disable
Note: You may need to slide your Settings
screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.
To return to SYNC 3, select the
speedometer icon in the Android Auto
menu bar at the bottom of the
touchscreen, and then touch the option to
return to SYNC.
Note: Contact Google for Android Auto
support.
NAVIGATION (If Equipped)
Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
412
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Map Mode
Map mode shows advanced viewing
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
and 3D city models (when available). 2D
city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use, landscape
features, and detailed railroad
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourism value.
3D city models are complete 3D models
of entire city areas including navigable
roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings.
3D landmarks and city models appear in
3D map mode only. Coverage of these
varies and improves with updated map
releases.
E207752
Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.
E207753
Select the zoom out icon to see
a farther away view of the map.
You can adjust the view in preset
increments. You can also pinch to zoom in
or out of the map.
The information bar tells you the names
of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover
over them with the crosshair curser.
You can change your view of the map by
tapping on the location indicator icon on
the right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options:
E207750
Heading up (2D map) This
always shows the direction of
forward travel to be upward on
the screen. This view is available
for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km).
E207749
North up (2D map) always
shows the northern direction to
be upward on the screen.
E207748
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
Adjust this viewing angle and
rotate the map 180 degrees by
touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
E207751
Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
map away from your vehicle’s
current location.
E251780
E251779
Mute: Press to mute the audio
navigation guidance. Press the
button again to un-mute the
guidance.
E207754
Points of Interest (POI)
grouping icon: You can choose
up to three POI icons to display
on the map. If the chosen POIs
are located close together or are
at the same location a box is used to
display a single category icon instead of
repeating the same icon, in order to reduce
clutter. When you select the box on the
map, a pop-up appears indicating how
many POIs are in this location. Select the
pop up to see a list of the available POIs.
You can scroll through and select POIs
from this list.
If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
station icons automatically display on the
map.
413
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link (where available), traffic
flow will be indicated on the map by green
(clear), yellow (slowing), and red
(stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is
indicated where the information is
available and varies across the US.
You can choose to display traffic icons on
the map representing twelve different
types of incidents. See Settings (page
423).
You can set a destination by hovering
above a location and selecting:
Button
Start
Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
DescriptionMenu Item
Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Street AddressSearch
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching
out of state
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes
with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340
Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)
414
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
Latitude and Longitude
(##.###### , ##.######)
This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are
accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select
as you type.
If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your
possible selections.
Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.Previous Destina-
tions You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
Select this option to remove all previous destinations.Delete
All
Select to navigate to your set Home destination.Home
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for home. Select:
Home
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
Select to navigate to your set Work destination.Work
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for work. Select:
Work
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
Favorites include any location you have previously saved.Favorites
To add Favorites:
Select this button and enter a location into the destination
bar.
Add a
Favorite
Select this option to have the system locate the address
you have entered.
Search
Select this button when the address you have entered
appears on the screen.
Save
415
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You
can now select this address from the favorites screen.
POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle
configuration):
Point of Interest
(POI) Categories
Food
Fuel
Hotel
ATM
Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected
a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking
for.
See All
Inside of these categories you can search by:
Nearby
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City
Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
This saves the destination to your favorites.Save
This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your
route from three different options.
Start
Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
Fastest
Uses the shortest distance possible.Shortest
Uses the most fuel-efficient route.Economical Route
The time and distance for each route also displays.
On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation.
The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode
screen.
Cancel
416
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Once you have chosen you destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your
destination.
Start
During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the
map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions.
When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the
distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the
vehicle is moving.
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining
travel time and the distance to your destination.
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point
of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually.
Navigation Menu
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
During active navigation, touch the bottom
of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.
To access the Navigation menu, press:
Button
Menu
You can then select:
A full screen map displays during navigation.Full MapScreen View
Highway exit information displays on the right hand side
of the screen during navigation.
Highway
Exit Info
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels,
fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the
exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of
specific locations. You can select the POI location as a
waypoint or destination if desired.
Only available during an active route. Displays all of the
turns on the current route.
Turn List
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by
selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears
and you can press:
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new
turn list.
417
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by
pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription
to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Traffic List
When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays
(if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 423).Navigation
Settings
Provides your current location city and the nearest road.Where Am I?
The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map
mode screen.
Cancel Route
Press this to see a map of the full route.View Route
An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.Detour
Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See
Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set
waypoints.
Edit Waypoints
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
Optimize OrderYou can
also have
the system
set the
order for
you by
pressing:
GoTo return to
your route
press:
Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route.
To add a waypoint:
1. Select the search icon (magnifying
glass) while on an active route. This
brings up the destination menu.
2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination
has been selected, the screen allows
you to set the destination as a
waypoint by selecting:
418
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
The waypoint list then appears and you are
able to re-order all of your waypoints by
selecting the menu icon on the right hand
side of the location. You can select up to
five waypoints.
Add Waypoint
Optimize OrderYou can also have the system set the order
for you by pressing:
GoTo return to your route, press:
SYNC AppLink
The AppLink app allows you to use some
SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone.
First Mile Navigation
When you switch your ignition off, the
location of your vehicle is recorded and
sent to your SYNC AppLink app. The
location of your vehicle can be viewed
within the app. You can also view walking
directions to your vehicle.
Last Mile Navigation
When you park near your destination, the
system provides walking directions to your
destination.
POI Search
Your paired phone can be used to access
additional points of interest (POI). These
points of interest can only be access when
your phone is paired.
Send To Car
You can send destinations to your
navigation system using a computer or
phone using AppLink.
cityseeker (If Equipped)
Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).
E225487
cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address, phone number and a star
rating.
Press More Information to see a photo,
a review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
419
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
•Restaurant
•Business center
•Handicap facilities
•Laundry
•Refrigerator
•24 hour room service
•Fitness center
•Internet access
•Pool
•Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of
operation and admission price.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link information. It helps you
locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see current sports scores. See Apps
(page 420).
The system calculates a reasonable
efficient route based on available speed
limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
know a local short cut that is more efficient
at a given time than the route provided by
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
difference in minutes or miles with the
SYNC 3 route.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in
the United States and Canada or
01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also
visit:
Website
www.navigation.com/sync
You need to specify the make and model
of your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to
www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
Map coverage includes the USA (including
Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
Canada and Mexico.
APPS
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
and touch screen control of SYNC 3
AppLink enabled smartphone apps.
Once an app is running through AppLink,
you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering
wheel controls.
420
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
vary by market.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit:
Websites
owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps will work automatically with no
setup. Other apps will want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or
favorites.We recommend you do this at
home or outside of your vehicle.
Note: We encourage you to review the
smartphone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Ford is not
responsible for your app or its use of data.
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system
feature. Accessing mobile apps through
AppLink is only possible when Android Auto
or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps
may only be accessible in the car through
AppLink and others only through Android
Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the
Smartphone Connectivity information to
disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the app needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.
Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile
device.
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
SYNC 3 will search
and connect to
compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.
Find Mobile Apps
Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
The connected device sends data to Ford
in the United States. The information is
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, odometer, usage
statistics and debugging information. We
retain this data for only as long as
necessary to provide this service,
troubleshoot, and improve products and
services and to offer you products and
services that may interest you where
allowed by law.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Ford reserves the right to limit
functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
any time.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
421
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 423).
App Permissions
The system organizes the App permissions
into groups. You can grant these group
permissions individually. You can change
a permission group status any time when
not driving, by using the settings menu.
While in the settings menu, you can also
see the data included in each group.
When you launch an app using SYNC 3,
the system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example Vehicle
information, Driving characteristics, GPS
and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You
can enable all groups or none of them
during the initial app permissions prompts.
The settings menu offers individual group
permission control.
Note: You are only prompted to grant
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.
Note: If you disable group permissions,
apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC
3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the
settings menu.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.
422
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite
places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
Map
Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.
Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
SETTINGS
Under this menu, you can access and
adjust the settings for many of the system
features. To access additional settings,
swipe the screen left or right.
Sound
Pressing this button allows you to adjust
the following:
Sound Settings
Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.Reset All
Adjusts the high frequency level.Treble
Adjusts the middle frequency level.Midrange
Adjusts the low frequency level.Bass
Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.Balance / Fade
423
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Sound Settings
Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,
or turns the feature off.
Speed
Compensated
Vol.
Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.Occupancy Mode
StereoSound Settings
Surround
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media
device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB
device is the active audio source. Pressing
the button allows you to access the
following options for active devices only.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:
Podcast Speed
FasterNormalSlower
For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:
Audiobook Speed
FasterNormalSlower
Cover art displays from your device’s music
files. If no cover art for the files exists on the
device, then the Gracenote Database provides
cover art.
Media PlayerCover Art Priority
The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is
used for your music files. This overrides any
cover art from your device.
Gracenote®
Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information
such as genre, artist, album.
Gracenote®
Management
424
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.Gracenote® Data-
base Info
This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your
media device.
Device Informa-
tion
Erase the stored in media information in order to re-index.Update Media
Index
Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and
arrows on the right adjust the minute. You
can then select AM or PM.
You can adjust the following features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select how time displays.Clock Format
When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.Auto Time Zone
Update This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.
When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.Reset Clock to
GPS Time
The system automatically saves any
updates you make to the settings.
Bluetooth
Pressing this button allows you to access
the following:
ActionMenu Item
Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permit
new connections.
Bluetooth
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a
Bluetooth-enabled device.
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth
device is the same as pairing a phone. See
Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how
to pair a device and the available options.
Phone
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
425
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:
Website
owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
View Devices
You can then select:
You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in
the previous table.
Add a Bluetooth
Device
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then
have the following options:
Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these
options to interact with the selected device.
Connect
426
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Disconnect
Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.Make Primary
Removes the selected device from the system.Delete
Pressing the info icon next to the device
name allows you to see phone and device
information
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Manage Contacts
You can then select:
Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your
phonebook to keep your contact list up to date.
Auto-Download
Contacts
Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You
can choose:
Sort By:
Last NameFirst Name
Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.Re-download
Contacts
Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the
in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.
Delete Contacts
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Set Phone Ringtone
You can then select:
No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.No Ringtone
The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive
a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option
is available, it is the default setting.
Use Phone Ring-
tone
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
427
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Text Messaging
You can then select:
No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.No Alert
(Silence)
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new
message.
Voice Readout
You can enable and disable the following options as well:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the
duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.
Mute Audio in
Privacy
When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when
you attempt to place a call.
Roaming
Warning
When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone
is running low.
Low Battery
Notification
911 Assist
Note: This service is only available in the
United States and Canada.
Select this button to modify the on or off
setting for this feature. If the mobile
phone’s contacts have been downloaded,
you can adjust the following option:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phone-
book as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the 911
Assist call process.
Set Emergency
Contacts
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source
such as AM or FM is the active media
source. Pressing the button allows you to
access the following features:
428
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.FM HD Radio
AM HD Radio
(Dependent on
current radio
source, If Avail-
able)
This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source.
Activate this feature to have the system display radio text.
Radio Text
RefreshAutoset Presets
(AST) Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current
location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source.
Sirius XM (If equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
After selecting a category, seek function only stops on channels which
are inside that selected category.
Set Category for
Seek
Select to create a personal identification number (PIN). This allows
you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.
Parental
Lockout
Select to switch on, off or delete alerts.Edit Alerts
The Electronic Serial Number can also be found on this screen. This number is necessary
to activate, modify or track your account through Sirius XM.
Navigation
You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.
429
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Map Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of build-
ings.
3D City Model
When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with
white dots.
Breadcrumbs
Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.POI Icons
A rest area POI icon may display on the map regardless of this setting.
Select POIsOnce this feature is activated you can select
the icons you want displayed by selecting:
This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like
to have displayed on the navigation map.
Incident Map
Icons
Route Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.Preferred Route
EcoFastestShortest
Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
calculates one route based on your preferred route setting.
Always Use ___
Route
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.
The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when
providing route guidance.
Use HOV Lanes
The system searches for and displays available parking locations as
you approach your destination.
Automatically
Find Parking
Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Eco Time
Penalty
430
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a
route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow
information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route
if possible.
Dynamic Route
Guidance
If selected, SYNC 3 avoids freeways when computing a navigation
route.
Avoid Freeways
If selected, SYNC 3 avoids Toll Roads when computing a navigation
route.
Avoid Toll
Roads
If selected, SYNC 3 avoids the use of Ferries or Trains when computing
a navigation route.
Avoid
Ferries/Car
Trains
Navigation Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Navigation Preferences
You can adjust how the system provides prompts.Guidance
Prompts
Then select any of the following:
A tone sounds followed by voice instructions.Voice and Tones
Only voice instructions are given.Voice Only
Only a tone sounds to prompt you.Tones Only
Mobile Apps
You can enable the control of compatible
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization
information and updates using the data
plan associated with the connected device.
The connected devices sends data to Ford
in the United States. The encrypted
information includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, anonymous usage
statistics and debugging information.
Updates may take place automatically.
Note: All Mobile Apps may not be
compatible with the system.
431
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford
is not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.Mobile Apps
Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automatic
updates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings
menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
This provides information on the current state of available app
updates.
Update Mobile
Apps
There are three possible statuses:
Updating Mobile Apps…Up-To-DateUpdate Needed
The system is trying to receive
an update.
No update is
required.
The system has
detected a new app
requiring authoriza-
tion or a general
permissions update is
required.
Select this button if an
update is required and you
want to request this update
manually. For example, when
your mobile device is
connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,
select:
Request Update
432
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Request Update
Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.All Apps
Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permis-
sions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you
can see which signals are included in each group.
There may also
be SYNC 3
enabled apps
listed under
these options.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.
General
Access and adjust the system settings,
voice features, as well as phone, navigation
and wireless settings.
Menu Item
Select to have the touchscreen display in English,
Spanish or French.
Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices
made through the touchscreen.
Touch Panel Beep
When you activate this option, the system automatic-
ally updates when you have an available Internet
connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile
connection.
Automatic System Updates
Information pertaining to the system and its software.About SYNC
Documentation of the software license for the system.Software Licenses
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all
personal settings and personal data.
Master Reset
Wi-Fi & Hotspot
Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot
settings and information.
System Wi-Fi
You can access the following:
433
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software
updates.
Wi-Fi
This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.Available
Networks Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect
from that network. The system may require a security code to
connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more
information about the network displays such as the signal strength,
connection status and security type.
The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi
network is within range if SYNC is not already connected.
Wi-Fi Available
Notifications
Vehicle Hotspot (If Equipped)
You can access the following:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off.Wi-Fi Hotspot
On/Off
Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and
password.
Settings
Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage.Data Usage
Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot.Manage Devices
Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle
Hotspot) may be operational while ignition
is On and may remain operational while the
ignition is Off.
Note: Vehicle Hotspot services are provided
by the vehicle network carrier, subject to
your vehicle network carrier agreement,
coverage and availability.
Note: It is the account owner’s
responsibility to remove the vehicle from
the vehicle network carrier account when
ownership of the vehicle is transferred. If the
owner would like to remove the vehicle from
the account for any reason, please contact
your vehicle network carrier for more
information.
434
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: : Data, e.g. the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), SIM Card ID, and data plan
usage, is shared between Ford and the
vehicle network carrier to provide the
Vehicle Hotspot service in accordance with
your vehicle network carrier agreement,
coverage and availability, and may be used
to enable a seamless transition from an old
to new embedded modem and to confirm
any updates are successfully delivered.
Note: : For your convenience data usage
may be available for monitoring under
Settings but may not reflect actual or
current usage. The vehicle network carrier
is responsible for providing information
about your account. Please contact the
vehicle network carrier for more information.
Note: : Ford may need to update operating
system software on your vehicle, including
security updates and bug fixes, to keep
connected services current, like Vehicle
Hotspot, without prior notice to you.
Note: If you do not have an active vehicle
hotspot data plan, open your web browser
and go to a website using the HTTP protocol
to be automatically redirected to the vehicle
network carrier landing page where you can
purchase data. Websites using HTTPS will
not automatically redirect.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.
This sets the color to the highest intensity.
You can drag the colors up and down to
increase or decrease the intensity.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the
active color once or drag the active color
all the way down to zero intensity.
Vehicle
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of
these features.
You can select the following features to
update their settings.
Door Keypad Code (If equipped)
Select this button to add or erase a
personal door keypad code. To add or
erase a personal code, you first need to
enter the five-digit factory set code. You
can find this code on the owner's wallet
card in the glove box or from your
authorized dealer.
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
When the reverse sensing system detects an object, it displays red,
yellow and green highlights at the top of the image.
Enhanced Park
Aids
You can enable or disable this option using the slider.Rear Camera
Delay
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter
of your owner manual.
435
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN)
Selecting this button on the settings menu
shows you the ESN number for your
system. You need this number for certain
registrations such as Satellite Radio.
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness
You can select:Mode
The screen automatically switches between day and
night modes based on the outside light level.
Auto
The screen displays with a light background to enhance
daytime viewing.
Day
The screen displays with a darker background to make
nighttime viewing easier.
Night
The screen goes black and does not display anything.
To switch the screen back on, simply tap the screen.
Off
Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based
on ambient lighting conditions.
Auto Dim
Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings
by selecting the following options.
Menu Item
Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts
and confirmations.
Advanced Mode
Enable this option to have the system confirm a contacts
name with you before making a call.
Phone Confirmation
Enable this option to have the system display a list of
available voice commands when the voice button is
pressed.
Voice Command List
436
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the
system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
When you select valet mode a pop up
appears informing you that a four digit
code must be entered to enable and
disable valet mode. You can use any PIN
you chose but you must use the same PIN
to disable valet mode. The system asks
you to input the code.
Note: If the system is locked and you
cannot remember the PIN, please contact
the Customer Relationship Center.
United States: 1-800-392-3673
Canada: 1-800-565-3673
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
To unlock the system, enter the same pin
number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
again.
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
However, should questions arise, please
refer to the tables below.
To check your cell phone's compatibility,
refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln
website.
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Refer to your device's manual about audio
adjustments.
The audio control
settings on your cell
phone may be affecting
SYNC 3 performance.
There is back-
ground noise
during a phone
call.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
During a call, I
can hear the
other person
but they cannot
hear me.
Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone
icon on the phone screen.
To restart your system, shut down the
engine, open and close the door, and then
lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes.
Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black
and the lighted USB port is off.
The system may need to
be restarted.
During a call, I
cannot hear the
other person
and they cannot
hear me.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
SYNC 3 is not
able to down-
load my phone-
book.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
437
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
Limitations on your cell
phone's capability.
The system
says "Phone-
book down-
loaded" but my
SYNC 3 phone-
book is empty or
is missing
contacts.
If the missing contacts are stored on your
SIM card, move them to your cell phone's
memory.
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
I am having
trouble
connecting my
cell phone to
SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and
deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
again.
Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
Text messaging
is not working
on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
Possible cell phone
malfunction.
iPhone •Go to your cell phone's Settings.
•Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
438
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
•Press the blue circle to the right of the
device named with your vehicle make
and model to enter the next menu.
•Turn Show Notifications on.
•Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone
from the SYNC 3 system to activate this
settings update.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward
incoming text messages to SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3
vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will
only forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the
messaging application.
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is
not supported by iPhone.
Text messages from WhatsApp and Face-
book Messenger are not supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
This is a cell phone-
dependent feature.
Audible text
messages do
not work on my
cell phone.
Because each cell phone is different, refer
to your device's manual for the specific cell
phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.
This is a cell phone limita-
tion.
439
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
Possible device malfunc-
tion.
I am having
trouble
connecting my
device.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
cable.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable
into the device and your vehicle's USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.
The device has a lock
screen enabled.
Make sure you are not leaving the device in
your vehicle during very hot or cold
temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC 3 does
not recognize
my device when
I start my
vehicle.
Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
3 and that you have started the media
player on your device.
This is a device-
dependent feature.
Bluetooth audio
does not
stream.
The device is not
connected.
Try switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
The device is in a bad
state.
Make sure that all song details are popu-
lated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC 3 does
not recognize
music that is on
my device.
Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
version.
The file may be
corrupted.
Some devices require you to change the
USB settings from mass storage to media
transfer protocol class.
The song may have
copyright protection that
does not allow it to play.
440
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Convert the file to a supported format. See
Entertainment (page 396).
The file format is not
supported by SYNC 3.
Update media index. See Settings (page
423).
The device needs to be
re-indexed.
Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.
The device has a lock
screen enabled.
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then connect it back
to SYNC 3.
This is a device limitation.
When I connect
my device, I
sometimes do
not hear any
sound.
To listen to Apple devices through USB,
select AirPlay from the devices Control
Center, then select Dock Connector.
To listen to Apple devices through
Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the
devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
Connect a compatible device or media
player.
The device or media
player is incompatible.
SYNC 3 does
not display the
song informa-
tion, repeat, or
shuffle buttons.
Wi-Fi Access Point issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Verify password.Password error.Failed connec-
tion. Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.Weak signal.
Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use
the default name unless it contains a
unique identifier, such as part of the MAC
address.
Multiple Access points
within range with the
same SSID.
441
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Access Point issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Position the vehicle close to the access
point with the front of the vehicle facing the
access point direction and remove
obstacles if possible. Other Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth, microwave and cordless phones
may cause interference.
Weak signal probably
due to distance from the
access point, obstruction
or high interference.
Disconnecting
after successful
connection.
If the vehicle is equipped with heated
windshield, try positioning the vehicle so
that the windshield is not facing the access
point. If you have metallic window tinting
but not on the windshield, position the
vehicle to face the access point. If all
windows are tinted, you can open the
windows in the direction of the access point
if that is feasible.
There may be an
obstruction between
SYNC 3 and the access
point.
Poor signal seen
by SYNC 3
despite being
near a access
point.
Try to remove other obstructions that may
impact signal quality such as opening the
garage door.
Please set the network to visible and try
again.
The access point was
defined as a hidden
network.
An access point
is not listed in
the list of avail-
able networks.
442
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Access Point issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 currently does not provide an
access point.
SYNC 3 does not
currently provide a
access point.
SYNC 3 is not
seen when
searching for
Wi-Fi networks
from your phone
or other devices.
Check the signal quality (under network
details), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excel-
lent, test with another high-speed equipped
access point where the environment is
more predictable.
Poor signal strength, too
far from the access point,
access point is
supporting multiple
connections, slow
Internet connection or
other problems.
Software down-
load takes too
long.
Test the connection with another device, if
the access point requires a subscription,
you may contact the service provider.
It is possible that there is
no new software. The
connected access point
may be a managed one
and it requires either a
subscription or agreeing
to the terms and condi-
tions.
SYNC 3 seems
to connect with
a access point
and the signal
strength is
excellent but
the software is
not being
updated.
443
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink Issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you have a compatible smart-
phone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or
an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or
higher. Additionally, make sure you pair and
connect your phone to SYNC 3 in order to
find AppLink-capable apps on your device.
iPhone users must also connect to a USB
port with an Apple USB cable.
You did not connect an
Applink Compatible
phone to SYNC 3.
AppLink Mobile
Applications:
When I select
"Find Mobile
Apps," SYNC 3
does not find
any applica-
tions.
Make sure you have downloaded and
installed the latest version of the app from
your phone's app store. Make sure the app
is running on your phone. Some apps
require you to register or login to the app
on the phone before using them with
AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford
SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings
menu on the phone.
AppLink-enabled apps
are not installed and
running on your mobile
device.
My phone is
connected, but I
still cannot find
any apps.
Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC
3 find the application if you cannot discover
it inside the vehicle. On an Android device,
if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then
select it and restart the app. If the app does
not have that option, select the phone's
settings menu and select 'Apps', then find
the particular app and choose 'Force stop.'
Do not forget to restart the app afterward,
then select "Find Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3.
Sometimes apps do not
properly close and re-
open their connection to
SYNC 3, over ignition
cycles, for example.
My phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, but I
still cannot find
any apps. On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an
app, double tap the home button then
swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the
home button again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a few seconds, the
app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile
App's Menu.
444
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink Issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset
it on your phone. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC 3 should be able to automatically re-
connect to your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth issue
on some older versions
of the Android operating
system that may cause
apps that were found on
your previous vehicle
drive to not be found
again if you did not
switch Bluetooth off.
My Android
phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, I
restarted them,
but I still cannot
find any apps.
Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait
a moment, and plug the USB cable back in
to the phone. After a few seconds, the app
should appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps
Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application
and restart it.
You may need to reset
the USB connection to
SYNC 3.
My iPhone is
connected, my
app is running, I
restarted the
app but I still
cannot find it on
SYNC 3.
Increase the Bluetooth volume of the
device by using the device's volume control
buttons which are most often found on the
side of the device.
The Bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an
Android phone.
I found and
started my
media app on
SYNC 3, but
there is no
sound or the
sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the apps you do not
want SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the
app's settings menu on the phone.
Some Android devices
have a limited number of
Bluetooth ports that
apps can use to connect.
If you have more AppLink
apps on your phone than
the number of available
Bluetooth ports, you will
not see all of your apps
listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.
I can only see
some of the
AppLink apps
running on my
phone listed in
the SYNC 3
Mobile Apps
Menu.
445
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Review the cell phone voice commands
and the media voice commands at the
beginning of their respective sections.
You may be using the
wrong voice commands.
SYNC 3 does
not understand
what I am
saying.
Refer to the audio display during an active
voice session to find a list of voice
commands there.
Wait for the system to prompt you before
you state your command.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong
time.
Review the media voice commands at the
beginning of the media section.
You may be using the
wrong voice commands.
SYNC 3 does
not understand
the name of a
song or artist.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is
displayed on your device. For example, say
"Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple
Rain".
You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your device.
Make sure you are saying the complete title
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
Nettles".
If there are any abbreviations in the name,
like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those:
"E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
Make sure that song titles, artists, album,
and playlists names do not have any special
characters like *, - or +.
The song or artist name
may have some special
characters that are not
being recognized by
SYNC 3.
Make sure that you are saying the name
exactly as it appears on your phone. For
example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson",
say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name
is "Mom", say "Call Mom".
You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phone-
book.
SYNC 3 does
not understand
or is calling the
wrong contact
when I want to
make a call. Make sure that your contact names do not
have any special characters like *, - or +.
The contact name may
contain special charac-
ters.
446
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the
contact names stored on your cell phone.
You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phone-
book.
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recog-
nizing foreign
names stored
on my cell
phone.
Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
for phonebook and then contact name.
Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
3 will read the contact name to you, giving
you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the names
stored on your media player or USB flash
drive. It is able to make some exceptions
for very popular artist names (for example,
U2) such that you can always use the
English pronunciation for these artists.
You may be saying the
foreign names using the
currently selected
language for SYNC 3.
The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recog-
nizing foreign
tracks, artists,
albums, genres
and playlist
names from my
media player or
USB flash drive.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated
voice rather than pre-recorded human
voice.
SYNC 3 uses text-to-
speech voice prompt
technology.
The system
generates voice
prompts and
the pronunci-
ation of some
words may not
be accurate for
my language.
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
447
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Possible cause and solutionIssue
Personal Profiles have not been set up.
I cannot create a profile.
An invalid profile name was entered.
A memory button was not selected when
prompted.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park or was shifted out of Run or Park while
creating a profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The lock button was not selected on a
keyfob when prompted.
I cannot link a keyfob.
The keyfob selected was already associ-
ated to another profile and an overwrite
was declined.
A profile recall was performed while linking
a keyfob.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park, or was shifted out of Run or Park while
linking a keyfob.
The old linking method is used.
The unsaved setting is not supported by
Personal Profiles.
My personalized settings do not save. A different Personal Profile is active than
expected.
Another user has changed settings for the
wrong Personal Profile.
A Personal Profile has not been created.
My profile will not recall.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The requested profile is already active.
The memory button being used is not linked
to a profile.
448
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Possible cause and solutionIssue
The keyfob being used is not linked to a
profile.
The wrong keyfob is being used.
A button other than unlock or remote start
is being pressed on a linked keyfob.
The Personal Profile was deleted.
Personal Profiles is turned off.My preset positions recall but my profile
does not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my preset positions
do not. The preset positions are the same as the
Guest or previously active profile.
Unlink and relink your keyfob in the
Personal Profiles menu. You may need to
see your authorized dealer.
I lost a keyfob.
Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed.
This could happen if you let dealership add
a new keyfob to replace lost one.
I lost all profiles.
Master Reset had been performed without
your acknowledgement.
449
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
General
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a
single module for text display, voice control
and voice prompts. The country where you
bought your vehicle dictates the four
languages based on the most popular
languages spoken. If the selected language
is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the
current active language.
SYNC 3 does not support
the currently selected
language for the instru-
ment cluster and inform-
ation and entertainment
display.
The language
selected for the
instrument
cluster and
information and
entertainment
display does not
match the
SYNC 3 SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
language
(phone, USB,
Bluetooth
audio, voice
control and
voice prompts).
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC
3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any
information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call
history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold
the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3
troubleshooting, refer to the regional Ford
or Lincoln website.
450
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
SYNC™ 3
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Ford Motor Company will warrant your
Ford accessory through the warranty that
provides the greatest benefit:
•24 months, unlimited mileage.
•The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
•Hood deflector*.
•Side window deflectors*.
•Splash guards.
•Spoiler winglets.
Interior Style
•Door sill plates.
•Floor mats.
•Interior light kit.
•Seat covers*.
Lifestyle
•Ash cup or smoker's packages.
•Camping tent*.
•Car cover*.
•Cargo area protector.
•Cargo net*.
•Cargo shade.
•Roof racks and carriers*.
•Recovery hook (towing eye).
•Soft cargo organizers.
•Tablet cradle.
•Trailer towing accessories.
Peace of Mind
•Bumper mounted warning sensors*.
•Keyless entry keypad.
•Remote start.
•Roadside assistance kits*.
•Vehicle security systems.
•Wheel locks.
*Ford Licensed Accessories. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer’s limited warranty details,
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
451
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
•When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
•The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
•An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
•If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
452
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plans (U.S. Only)
Ford Protect extended service plan means
peace of mind. It’s the extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and
provides more protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When
you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford
Protect extended service plans!
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
extended service plan. With Ford Protect
extended service plan you minimize your
risk for unexpected repair bills and rising
repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four mechanical Ford Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to
list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
•Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership.
•Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
the day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including warranty repairs, and
Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
•Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts.
•Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
•Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
•Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage or other transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
more peace of mind.
453
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your
Vehicle
Ford Protect extended service plan also
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
•Windshield wiper blades.
•Spark plugs.
•The clutch disc (if equipped).
•Brake pads and linings.
•Shock absorbers.
•Struts.
•Engine Belts.
•Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
•Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if
equipped).
•Cabin air filter replacement every
20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric
vehicles only).
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 10% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Ford Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Ford Protect Extended Service
Plan (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
extended service plan. Ford Protect
extended service plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company
of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
•Rental reimbursement.
•Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
•Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
•Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations.
Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
and rental. When you purchase Ford
Protect extended service plan, you receive
added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Mexico, provided by a network of
participating authorized Ford Motor
Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of
Canada, the United States and Mexico are
not eligible for Ford Protect extended
service plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information; visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Protect extended service plan that is
right for you.
454
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Ford Protect
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 301).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
displays a message in the information
display at the proper oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10,000 mi (16,000 km).
455
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 mi
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor after each oil change. See
General Information (page 93).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from
your last oil change. Never exceed one year
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil
change intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
456
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display).
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
457
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Engine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
pressure2
Fluid levels1; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
1 Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
2If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
458
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Vehicle Use and ExampleInterval
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi
(12,000–16,000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5,000–7,500 mi
(8,000–12,000 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3,000–5,000 mi
(5,000–8,000 km) Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display1
Change engine oil and filter.
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints (ALL-Wheel Drive).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-
joints.
459
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display1
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
1 Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
Other Maintenance Items 1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20,000 mi
(32,000 km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change engine coolant. 2
At 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km) Inspect accessory drive belt(s). 3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km) Replace accessory drive belt(s). 4
Replace timing belt (1.5L engine).
1 Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and
filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2 Initial replacement at six years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km), then every three years or
5,000 mi (8,000 km).
3 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4 If not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
460
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message appearing in the
information display.
•Example 1: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message comes on at
28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
•Example 2: The OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) (for example, the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset
at 25,000 mi (40,000 km)). Perform
the engine air filter replacement.
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect rear axle and U-joints (AWD).Inspect frequently, service
as required
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
(Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.1
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
461
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use
(Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery)
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
1 This is an optional feature.
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)
Replace cabin air filter.1
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
1 This is an optional feature.
Exclusive Use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles Only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Every oil change
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
462
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
The normal oil change interval for vehicles
operating in the Middle East, North Africa,
Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates using an American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil
of SM or SN quality is 3,000 mi
(5,000 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty
and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in
these conditions require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine
air filter and cabin air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
463
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
464
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
465
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
466
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
467
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
468
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
469
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
470
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
471
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
472
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
473
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the
front seats), or in front seat areas that may
come into contact with a deploying airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna
cables to original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes
and brake pipes.
WARNING: Keep antenna and power
cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from any
electronic modules and airbags.
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other
applicable local requirements). It is your
responsibility to make sure that any
equipment an authorized dealer installs on
your vehicle complies with applicable local
legislation and other requirements.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
following table. We do not provide special
provisions or conditions for installations or
use.
Car
E239120
474
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
475
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (Peak
RMS)
Frequency Band
MHz
1501-30
2, 35050-54
2, 35068-88
2, 350142-176
2, 350380-512
2, 310806-870
Note: After the installation of radio
frequency transmitters, check for
disturbances from and to all electrical
equipment in your vehicle, both in the
standby and transmit modes.
Check all electrical equipment:
•With the ignition ON.
•With the engine running.
•During a road test at various speeds.
Check that electromagnetic fields
generated inside your vehicle cabin by the
transmitter installed do not exceed
applicable human exposure requirements.
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
•You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
•The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
476
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
•You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
•Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
•Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
•Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
•Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
477
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
•SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
•Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
•Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
•Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
•Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(I) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
•Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.
478
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
479
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
•Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.
General Operation
•Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
•Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
•Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
•Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
•Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
•Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
•Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
•Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
•Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
480
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
•You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
•When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
481
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
•The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.
(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
482
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
•I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
•ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
•iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all
483
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
484
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
•Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
•(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
•To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
485
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
•TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
•Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
•TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
•You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit
486
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
•You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
487
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
•The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand. 20xx. All rights reserved
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.
488
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
489
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
490
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
B. Canada Data. The following provi-
sions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representa-
tions or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
spective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tion with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reason-
ably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
491
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses-
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
tion to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provi-
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi-
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeTerritory
IGN “INSTITUTO
GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
ARGENTINO”
Argen-
tina
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
492
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
Jordan
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement,
HERE shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applica-
tions, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
493
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
“© Bundesamt für Eich-
und Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance
Survey data © Crown
copyright and database
right 2010 Contains Royal
Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
right 2010”
Great Britain
“Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.”
Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
al tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
494
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische
Grundlage: © Bundesamt
für Landestopographie.
Switzerland
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
tion Limited and its licensors.”
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Telematics Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
495
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
SERVICES
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
496
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
497
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
498
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
499
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Radio Frequency Statement
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
Taiwan Territory
Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave
radiation motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models,
companies, firms or users must not alter
the frequency, increase the power or
change the characteristics and functions
of the original design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference
be detected, immediately stop using the
device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any
interference. For the legal
telecommunication and wireless
telecommunication of the telco, the
low-power radio frequency motor must be
able to tolerate legal limits of interference
from telecommunication, industrial,
scientific and radio wave equipment.
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
AND CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept
certain terms and conditions. The following
is a brief summary of the terms and
conditions that apply to you. To view the
full terms and conditions relevant to your
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
1. Acceptance
500
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
ditions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for
your personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
SUNA Products and/or Services are
intended as an aid to personal motoring
and travel planning, and do not provide
comprehensive or accurate information on
all occasions. On occasions, you may
experience additional delay as a result of
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
acknowledge that it is not intended, or
suitable, for use in applications where time
of arrival or driving directions may impact
the safety of the public or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and
active, remain at all times responsible for
observing all relevant laws and codes of
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only
actively operate SUNA Products and/or
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.
5. Service Continuity and Reception of
the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
SUNA Products and/or Services at any
time.
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
the manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. You also acknowledge that the
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
guarantees nor make any warranties that
relate to the availability, accuracy or
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.
7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development
may mean that some information is not
entirely up-to-date. The information in this
document is subject to change without
notice.
501
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Appendices
502
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
4
4WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive......................................155
A
A/C
See: Climate Control.........................................108
About This Manual...........................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................160
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................160
Accessories.....................................................451
Exterior Style........................................................451
Interior Style.........................................................451
Lifestyle..................................................................451
Peace of Mind......................................................451
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................12
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............183
Active Park Assist..........................................172
Using Active Park Assist...................................173
Adjusting the Headlamps........................258
Horizontal Aim Adjustment..........................260
Vertical Aim Adjustment................................258
Adjusting the Steering Wheel.....................71
Airbag Disposal...............................................47
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control.........................................108
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter............266
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................70
Ambient Lighting.............................................81
Adjusting the Brightness...................................82
Changing the Color..............................................82
Switching Ambient Lighting Off.....................82
Switching Ambient Lighting On......................82
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................70
Arming the Alarm.................................................70
Disarming the Alarm...........................................70
Appendices....................................................474
Apps.................................................................420
..................................................................................420
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................422
At a Glance........................................................16
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............92
Automatic Transmission Warning
Chime...................................................................92
Engine On Warning Chime................................92
Headlamps On Warning Chime......................92
Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................92
Keyless Warning Alert ........................................92
Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................92
Audio Control....................................................71
Type One...................................................................71
Type Two..................................................................72
Audio System.................................................321
General Information...........................................321
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Touchscreen Display.................324
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC..............................................................322
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/
CD....................................................................327
Menu Structure...................................................329
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony Audio
System..........................................................326
Autolamps........................................................78
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps........................................................78
Automatic Climate Control......................109
Dual Zone Temperature Control.....................111
Single Zone Temperature Control..................111
Smart Zone.............................................................111
Switching Back to Single Zone
Temperature Control......................................111
Automatic High Beam Control..................79
Automatic High Beam Indicator....................80
Switching the System On and Off................80
Automatic Transmission.............................151
Brake-Shift Interlock Override.......................153
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow..................................................................154
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission...................................................152
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission..............................151
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check............................................................254
503
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Index
Auto-Start-Stop............................................137
Disabling Auto-Start-Stop.............................138
Enabling Auto-Start-Stop...............................137
Autowipers........................................................74
Autowipers Settings............................................75
Auxiliary Power Points................................128
110 Volt AC Power Point...................................128
12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................128
Locations...............................................................128
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................255
Blind Spot Information System..............195
Switching the System Off and On...............196
System Errors.......................................................196
Using the Blind Spot Information
System...............................................................195
BLIS
See: Blind Spot Information System...........195
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........243
Booster Seats..................................................25
Types of Booster Seats......................................26
Brake Fluid Check........................................254
Brakes...............................................................160
General Information..........................................160
Breaking-In......................................................216
Bulb Specification Chart..........................264
C
Cabin Air Filter.................................................114
Capacities and Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoost™................................................308
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates.............................................................311
Specifications.....................................................309
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................312
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates............................................................316
Specifications.......................................................313
Capacities and Specifications -
2.5L.................................................................316
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................320
Specifications.......................................................317
Capacities and Specifications.................301
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................268
Catalytic Converter......................................148
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................149
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing...................................................149
Center Console..............................................130
Changing a Bulb..........................................260
Cornering Lamp (HID Headlamps) ............262
Lamp Assembly Condensation...................260
Replacing Fog, Park and Turn Signal
Bulbs..................................................................262
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs............................261
Replacing HID Headlamp Bulbs...................262
Replacing High-Mount Brake Lamp
Bulb....................................................................264
Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulb..........264
Replacing Reverse Lamp Assembly...........264
Replacing Side Marker Bulbs........................262
Replacing Turn Signal Bulbs.........................263
Changing a Fuse............................................241
Fuses.......................................................................241
Changing a Road Wheel...........................295
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.....................................................295
Tire Change Procedure....................................296
Changing the 12V Battery.........................255
Battery Management System.......................257
Changing the Engine Air Filter................266
Duratec Engines..................................................267
EcoBoost Engines.............................................266
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................258
Front Wiper Blades...........................................258
Rear Window Wiper Blade.............................258
Checking MyKey System Status...............56
Checking the Wiper Blades......................257
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance..................................................37
Child Restraint Positioning..........................27
Child Safety.......................................................18
General Information.............................................18
Child Safety Locks.........................................29
Left-Hand Side.....................................................30
Right-Hand Side...................................................30
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................272
504
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Index
Cleaning Products.......................................268
Materials...............................................................268
Cleaning the Engine....................................270
Cleaning the Exterior..................................268
Cleaning the Headlamps................................269
Exterior Chrome Parts.....................................269
Exterior Plastic Parts........................................269
Stripes or Graphics...........................................269
Underbody...........................................................269
Under Hood.........................................................269
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens..........................271
Cleaning the Interior.....................................271
Cleaning the Wheels...................................273
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................270
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................54
Climate Control............................................108
Collision Warning System.........................199
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION...........................199
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check...........................250
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......46
Creating a MyKey...........................................54
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................54
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................196
Blocked Sensors.................................................198
Switching the System Off and On...............198
System Errors.......................................................198
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts..................................................................198
System Limitations............................................198
Using the Cross Traffic Alert System..........196
Cruise Control..................................................72
Principle of Operation.......................................182
Type One..................................................................72
Type Two..................................................................73
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control................................182
Customer Assistance.................................225
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording..........................................10
Service Data Recording........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps.............................79
Type One - Conventional
(Non-Configurable)........................................79
Type Two - Configurable...................................79
Digital Radio..................................................332
HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting............................................333
Direction Indicators........................................81
Doors and Locks.............................................59
Driver Alert......................................................189
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION...........................189
USING DRIVER ALERT.....................................189
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................40
Children and Airbags............................................41
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment.......................................................40
Driver Knee Airbag.........................................45
Driving Aids.....................................................189
Driving Hints...................................................216
Driving Through Water................................217
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................79
E
Economical Driving......................................216
Electric Parking Brake..................................161
Applying the Electric Parking brake..............161
Battery With No Charge...................................163
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake...........162
Electromagnetic Compatibility...............474
Emission Law..................................................147
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance.........148
Tampering With a Noise Control
System...............................................................147
End User License Agreement..................476
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................476
Engine Block Heater....................................135
Using the Engine Block Heater......................135
Engine Coolant Check...............................250
Adding Coolant..................................................250
Coolant Change..................................................252
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management..................................................253
Fail-Safe Cooling................................................252
Recycled Coolant...............................................252
505
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Index
Severe Climates..................................................252
Engine Emission Control............................147
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................69
Engine Oil Check..........................................248
Adding Engine Oil..............................................248
Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.5L
EcoBoost™.................................................248
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost™/
2.5L................................................................248
Engine Specifications - 1.5L
EcoBoost™..................................................301
Drivebelt Routing................................................301
Engine Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................301
Drivebelt Routing...............................................302
Engine Specifications - 2.5L....................302
Drivebelt Routing...............................................303
Entertainment..............................................396
AM/FM Radio......................................................398
Apps.......................................................................406
Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................405
CD...........................................................................404
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available).........................................................401
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated).......................................................398
Sources..................................................................397
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information................................406
USB Ports............................................................406
Environment......................................................15
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake..............................161
Essential Towing Checks...........................212
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................213
Hitches....................................................................212
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC).........................................214
Safety Chains.......................................................212
Trailer Brakes........................................................213
Trailer Lamps........................................................213
Trailer Towing Connector.................................212
When Towing a Trailer.......................................213
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options.................................14
Exterior Mirrors................................................84
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................85
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................84
Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................84
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors..........................85
Memory Mirrors.....................................................84
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................84
Puddle Lamps ......................................................84
Signal Indicator Mirrors......................................84
F
Fastening the Seatbelts...............................32
How to Extract Seatbelts in the Rear
Outermost Positions......................................34
Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................33
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................33
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................295
Floor Mats........................................................217
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................80
Ford Credit..........................................................11
US Only......................................................................11
Ford Protect...................................................453
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
(CANADA ONLY)..........................................454
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Only)..................................................................453
Four-Wheel Drive.........................................155
Principle of Operation.......................................155
Front Fog Lamps............................................80
Front Parking Aid..........................................169
Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................170
Front Passenger Sensing System.............41
Fuel and Refueling.......................................139
Fuel Consumption........................................145
Advertised Capacity..........................................145
Calculating Fuel Economy..............................145
Filling the Fuel Tank...........................................145
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.......................140
Fuel Filter........................................................255
Fuel Quality.....................................................139
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Vehicles.............................................................139
Switching Between E85 and
Gasoline............................................................140
Fuel Shutoff...................................................220
506
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Index
Fuses.................................................................232
Fuse Specification Chart...........................232
Luggage Compartment Fuse Panel...........238
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel..................................................................236
Power Distribution Box....................................232
Pre-Fuse Box.......................................................232
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener............124
Gauges...............................................................88
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............89
Fuel Gauge.............................................................89
Information Display............................................88
Gearbox
See: Transmission...............................................151
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................48
Intelligent Access.................................................48
General Maintenance Information.......455
Multi-Point Inspection.....................................457
Owner Checks and Services.........................456
Protecting Your Investment...........................455
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................455
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................455
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................228
Getting the Services You Need...............225
Away From Home..............................................225
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake..............................................161
Hazard Flashers...........................................220
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................258
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................79
Headrest
See: Head Restraints..........................................116
Head Restraints.............................................116
Adjusting the Head Restraint..........................118
Heated Seats..................................................123
Heated Steering Wheel................................73
Heated Windows and Mirrors...................114
Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................114
Heated Rear Window.........................................114
Windshield Wiper De-icer.................................114
Heating
See: Climate Control.........................................108
Hill Start Assist..............................................163
Switching the System On and Off...............164
Using Hill Start Assist.......................................164
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate............................................................111
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather..............................................................114
General Hints..........................................................111
Quickly Cooling the Interior..............................113
Quickly Heating the Interior.............................112
Recommended Settings for Cooling............113
Recommended Settings for Heating............113
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................160
Home Screen................................................388
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........243
I
Ignition Switch................................................131
In California (U.S. Only).............................226
Information Display Control.......................73
Information Displays.....................................93
General Information............................................93
Information Messages.................................96
Airbag........................................................................97
Alarm.........................................................................97
Automatic Engine Shutdown...........................97
Auto Start-Stop....................................................98
Battery and Charging System.........................98
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System.....................................................99
Collision Warning and Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC).................................................100
Doors......................................................................100
Engine......................................................................101
Four-Wheel Drive................................................101
Hill Start Assist....................................................102
Keyless Vehicle....................................................102
Lighting...................................................................103
Maintenance........................................................103
507
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Index
Message Indicator...............................................96
MyKey......................................................................103
Park Aid..................................................................104
Park Brake.............................................................104
Power Steering....................................................105
Remote Start.......................................................105
Starting System .................................................105
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.................106
Traction Control..................................................106
Trailer......................................................................106
Transmission........................................................107
Installing Child Restraints............................19
Child Restraints......................................................19
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts.........................20
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................22
Using Tether Straps.............................................24
Instrument Cluster........................................88
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................78
Instrument Panel Overview........................16
Instrument Panel Overview..............................16
Interior Lamps..................................................81
Front Interior Lamps............................................81
Rear Interior Lamps..............................................81
Interior Mirror...................................................85
Automatic Dimming Mirror...............................85
Manual Dimming Mirror.....................................85
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................221
To Connect the Booster Cables....................222
To Start the Engine............................................222
K
Keyless Entry....................................................62
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD...............................................................62
Keyless Starting..............................................131
Ignition Modes......................................................132
Keys and Remote Controls........................48
L
Lane Keeping System.................................190
Switching the System On and Off................191
Liftgate...............................................................65
Lighting Control...............................................77
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam..............78
Headlamp High Beam.........................................77
Lighting...............................................................77
General Information.............................................77
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers............203
Load Carrying................................................202
Load Limit......................................................204
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................208
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer................................................................204
Locking and Unlocking.................................59
Activating Intelligent Access...........................60
Autolock...................................................................61
Battery Saver.........................................................62
Illuminated Entry..................................................62
Illuminated Exit.....................................................62
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade...........................................................59
Opening a Rear Door from the Inside..........60
Power Door Locks................................................59
Remote Control....................................................59
Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter.........................................................61
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys.......................................................................61
Luggage Covers............................................202
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................295
M
Maintenance..................................................243
General Information.........................................243
Manual Climate Control............................108
Manual Liftgate..............................................65
Closing the Liftgate.............................................65
Opening the Liftgate...........................................65
Manual Seats..................................................118
Adjusting the Seat Backrest............................119
Adjusting the Seat Height................................119
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward..............................................................118
508
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Index
Memory Function...........................................121
Saving a PreSet Position...................................121
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................93
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors...............114
See: Windows and Mirrors................................83
Mobile Communications Equipment.......13
Moonroof..........................................................86
Bounce-Back.........................................................87
Opening and Closing the Moonroof..............87
Opening and Closing the Sunscreen............86
Venting the Moonroof.........................................87
Motorcraft Parts - 1.5L
EcoBoost™.................................................303
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L
EcoBoost™................................................304
Motorcraft Parts - 2.5L..............................305
MyKey Troubleshooting................................57
MyKey™.............................................................53
Principle of Operation.........................................53
N
Navigation.......................................................412
cityseeker..............................................................419
Destination Mode...............................................414
Map Mode.............................................................413
Navigation Map Updates...............................420
Navigation Menu.................................................417
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link..................420
SYNC AppLink.....................................................419
Waypoints.............................................................418
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........458
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™........................458
Normal Maintenance Intervals....................459
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................249
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................248
Opening and Closing the Hood..............243
Closing the Hood...............................................244
Opening the Hood.............................................243
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................230
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual.........230
Overhead Console.......................................130
P
Parking Aids...................................................168
Principle of Operation......................................168
Parking Brake..................................................161
Passive Anti-Theft System........................69
SecuriLock®...........................................................69
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................69
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Personal Safety System™..........................38
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?..................................................................38
Phone...............................................................407
During a Phone Call...........................................410
Making Calls.......................................................409
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time...................................................................407
Phone Menu........................................................408
Receiving Calls....................................................410
Smartphone Connectivity................................411
Text Messaging.....................................................411
Post-Crash Alert System...........................223
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................59
Power Liftgate.................................................66
Hands-Free Feature............................................68
Obstacle Detection.............................................68
Opening and Closing the Liftgate..................66
Setting the Liftgate Open Height...................67
Stopping the Liftgate Movement...................67
Power Seats....................................................119
Power Lumbar.......................................................121
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................255
Power Windows..............................................83
Accessory Delay...................................................84
Bounce-Back.........................................................83
One-Touch Close.................................................83
One-Touch Open.................................................83
Rear Window Lock...............................................83
Protecting the Environment........................15
Puncture
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................295
509
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Index
R
Rear Parking Aid...........................................168
Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................169
Rear Seat Armrest........................................130
Rear Seats........................................................122
Folding the Seatback........................................122
Recline Adjustment............................................122
Unfolding the Seatback....................................122
Rear Under Floor Storage.........................202
Adjustable Load Floor......................................202
Cargo Management System.........................202
Rear View Camera........................................178
Using the Rear View Camera System.........179
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera....................................178
Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........75
Rear Window Washer.........................................76
Recommended Towing Weights............210
Refueling..........................................................142
Refueling System Overview............................142
Refueling System Warning.............................144
Refueling Your Vehicle......................................143
Remote Control..............................................48
Car Finder.................................................................51
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter....................48
Intelligent Access Key........................................49
Remote Start..........................................................51
Replacing the Battery.........................................49
Sounding a Panic Alarm.....................................51
Remote Start...................................................115
Automatic Settings.............................................115
Previous Settings.................................................115
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............273
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................12
Collision Repairs....................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs..................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control.............................................................52
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................230
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................230
Roadside Assistance...................................219
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................220
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage................220
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance.......................................................220
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance....................................219
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance....................................219
Roadside Emergencies...............................219
Roof Racks and Load Carriers................203
Adjusting the Crossbar....................................203
Running-In
See: Breaking-In..................................................216
Running Out of Fuel......................................141
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container...........................................................141
Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................141
S
Safety Canopy™............................................45
Safety Precautions.......................................139
Satellite Radio..............................................334
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN).................................................................335
Satellite Radio Reception Factors...............335
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service..................335
Troubleshooting.................................................336
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........463
Scheduled Maintenance...........................455
Seatbelt Extension.........................................37
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................34
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................35
Belt-Minder™........................................................35
Seatbelts............................................................31
Principle of Operation..........................................31
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime...............................................................35
Conditions of operation.....................................35
Seats..................................................................116
Security..............................................................69
Settings...........................................................423
911 Assist...............................................................428
Ambient Lighting...............................................435
Bluetooth..............................................................425
510
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Index
Clock.......................................................................425
Display...................................................................436
General..................................................................433
Media Player........................................................424
Mobile Apps..........................................................431
Navigation............................................................429
Phone.....................................................................425
Radio......................................................................428
Sound.....................................................................423
Valet Mode...........................................................437
Vehicle...................................................................435
Voice Control.......................................................436
Wi-Fi & Hotspot.................................................433
Side Airbags.....................................................43
Side Sensing System...................................170
Obstacle Distance Indicator............................171
Sitting in the Correct Position...................116
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains..................................291
Spare Wheel
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................295
Special Notices................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and
Utility Type Vehicles........................................13
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................13
Special Instructions..............................................12
Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance............13
Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow............13
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................461
Exceptions............................................................462
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control............................................182
Stability Control............................................166
Principle of Operation......................................166
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch............................................131
Starting a Gasoline Engine........................132
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................133
Failure to Start.....................................................133
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................134
Important Ventilating Information...............135
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving................................................................134
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................134
Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................132
Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................132
Starting and Stopping the Engine...........131
General Information...........................................131
Steering............................................................199
Electric Power Steering....................................199
Steering Wheel.................................................71
Storage Compartments.............................130
Sunroof
See: Moonroof......................................................86
Sun Visors.........................................................86
Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................86
Supplementary Restraints System.........39
Principle of Operation........................................39
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ 3........................................................376
General Information..........................................376
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting......................437
SYNC™ Applications and
Services........................................................354
911 Assist...............................................................354
SYNC Mobile Apps............................................356
SYNC™...........................................................338
General Information.........................................338
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................368
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications.............301
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).......................227
Tire Care..........................................................278
Glossary of Tire Terminology.........................279
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading..............................................................278
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall...........................................................280
Temperature A B C............................................279
Traction AA A B C...............................................278
Treadwear.............................................................278
Tire Pressure Monitoring System............291
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................293
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System ......................................293
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................276
511
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Index
Towing a Trailer............................................209
Load Placement................................................209
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels...........................................................214
Emergency Towing.............................................214
Recreational Towing..........................................214
Towing.............................................................209
Traction Control............................................165
Principle of Operation.......................................165
Trailer Sway Control....................................210
Transmission Code Designation............307
Transmission...................................................151
Transporting the Vehicle...........................223
Trip Computer.................................................96
All Value..................................................................96
Average Fuel..........................................................96
Digital Speedo......................................................96
Distance to E..........................................................96
Instantaneous Fuel.............................................96
Resetting the Trip Computer...........................96
Trip Odometer.......................................................96
Trip Timer................................................................96
U
Under Hood Overview - 1.5L
EcoBoost™.................................................244
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.................................................245
Under Hood Overview - 2.5L...................246
Unique Driving Characteristics.................137
Universal Garage Door Opener................124
HomeLink Wireless Control System............124
USB Port..........................................................337
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................183
Automatic Cancellation...................................186
Blocked Sensor....................................................187
Canceling the Set Speed.................................185
Changing the Set Speed..................................185
Detection Issues.................................................186
Following a Vehicle............................................184
Hilly Condition Usage.......................................186
Overriding the Set Speed................................185
Resuming the Set Speed.................................185
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............184
Setting the Gap Distance................................184
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off.......................................................................186
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On........................................................................183
Switching to Normal Cruise Control...........188
System Not Available........................................187
Using Cruise Control....................................182
Switching Cruise Control Off..........................182
Switching Cruise Control On..........................182
Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................155
Driving in Special Conditions With
Four-Wheel Drive...........................................155
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems...........................................................57
Using Snow Chains......................................291
Using Stability Control................................167
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................359
Accessing Your USB Song Library...............363
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings............................................................365
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port..........................................................359
Media Menu Features......................................362
Media Voice Commands................................360
USB 2.....................................................................365
Voice Commands for Audio Sources.........366
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............342
Accessing Features through the Phone
Menu..................................................................347
Accessing Your Phone Settings...................350
Bluetooth Devices..............................................351
Making Calls........................................................346
Pairing a Phone for the First Time...............343
Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................344
Phone Options during an Active Call.........346
Phone Voice Commands................................344
Receiving Calls...................................................346
System Settings.................................................352
Text Messaging..................................................348
Using Traction Control................................165
Switching the System Off...............................165
System Indicator Lights and
Messages..........................................................165
Using a Switch.....................................................165
Using the Information Display
Controls.............................................................165
Using Voice Recognition...........................340
Audio Voice Commands.................................390
512
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Index
Climate Voice Commands..............................391
Initiating a Voice Session...............................340
Mobile App Voice Commands......................394
Navigation Voice Commands.......................393
Phone Voice Commands................................392
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands.....................................................395
System Interaction and Feedback...............341
Voice Settings Commands............................395
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................228
V
Vehicle Care...................................................268
General Information.........................................268
Vehicle Certification Label.......................307
Vehicle Identification Number...............306
Vehicle Storage.............................................273
Battery....................................................................274
Body........................................................................273
Brakes.....................................................................274
Cooling system....................................................274
Engine.....................................................................274
Fuel system..........................................................274
General...................................................................273
Miscellaneous......................................................274
Removing Vehicle From Storage..................274
Tires.........................................................................274
Ventilation
See: Climate Control.........................................108
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...........306
Voice Control....................................................72
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators................89
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................89
Airbag - Front........................................................90
Anti-Lock Braking System................................90
Auto Start-Stop...................................................90
Battery.....................................................................90
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................90
Brake System........................................................90
Cruise Control.......................................................90
Direction Indicator...............................................90
Electric Park Brake..............................................90
Engine Oil.................................................................91
Fasten Seatbelt.....................................................91
Fog Lamps - Front................................................91
High Beam...............................................................91
Information..............................................................91
Low Fuel Level........................................................91
Low Tire Pressure Warning................................91
Parking Lamps.......................................................91
Service Engine Soon............................................91
Traction and Stability Control.........................92
Traction and Stability Control Off..................92
Washer Fluid Check....................................255
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................268
Waxing.............................................................270
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................295
Wheels and Tires.........................................276
General Information..........................................276
Technical Specifications.................................299
Windows and Mirrors....................................83
Windshield Washers......................................75
Front Camera Washer.........................................75
Windshield Wipers.........................................74
Intermittent Wipe.................................................74
Speed Dependent Wipers.................................74
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................257
Wipers and Washers.....................................74
513
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing
Index
514
Escape (TM2) Canada/United States of America, JJ5J 19A321 AC enUSA, Edition date: 201706, Fourth-Printing

Navigation menu